Patent Publication Number: US-9885195-B1

Title: Pool cleaner roller assembly

Description:
FIELD OF THE PRESENT DISCLOSURE 
     Embodiments of the present disclosure relate to swimming pool cleaners and, more particularly, to automatic swimming pool cleaners movable along all pool surfaces including a pool waterline or water surface for purposes of cleaning debris therefrom, associated apparatus for separating debris from a fluid stream traveling through the swimming pool cleaner, and apparatus for facilitating maintenance of a swimming pool cleaner and associated apparatus. 
     BACKGROUND OF THE PRESENT DISCLOSURE 
     Swimming pools commonly require a significant amount of maintenance. Beyond the treatment and filtration of pool water, the bottom wall (the “floor”) and side walls of a pool (the floor and the side walls collectively, the “walls” of the pool) are scrubbed regularly. Additionally, leaves and other debris often times elude a pool filtration system and settle on the bottom of the pool, get stuck at the pool waterline, or float on the pool water surface. 
     Automated pool cleaning devices, e.g., swimming pool cleaners, have been developed to routinely navigate about the pool walls, cleaning as they go. A rotating cylindrical roller (formed of foam and/or provided with a brush) can be included on the bottom of the pool cleaner to scrub the pool walls, while a pump system continuously circulates water through a filter assembly of the pool cleaner capturing debris and any suspended particulate therein. The pool cleaner lengthens the life of the main pool filter (e.g., a sand, diatomaceous earth (D.E.), or cartridge filter) in fluid communication with the fluid circulation line of the swimming pool, and reduces the time between changes or backwash cycles of the main filter. 
     The pool cleaner&#39;s filter assembly often includes traditional filter elements, such as bags, mesh, baskets, etc., that are utilized to trap any debris and particulate removed from a pool surface by the cleaner. These traditional filter elements generally have limited surface area that can quickly become clogged or occluded by the debris and particulate that they are utilized to contain. As the filter elements become clogged the cleaner can start to operate improperly, for example, the cleaner may lose suction performance. Once the filter elements have become sufficiently clogged, or have been occluded to a point that cleaner performance has been reduced below a desired level, the filter elements have to be cleaned or replaced. This can often occur prior to the debris retention area of a pool cleaner being completely full. That is, the surface of the bag, mesh, or basket can become clogged prior to the debris retention volume thereof being filled to capacity. Further, to rinse or replace the filter elements, or empty the basket, a user will often have to directly handle the filter element and subsequently debris, and in the case of a basket, will have to open a lid of the cleaner to retrieve the basket from within the unit and spray the basket with water which may result in debris and water getting on them. 
     During cleaning, the pool cleaner will traverse the pool surfaces brushing or scrubbing the debris therefrom, often encountering obstacles, such as lights, drains, etc., along the way. These obstacles can cause the cleaner to get stuck for the duration of a cleaning period, resulting in the pool being only partially cleaned. 
     What is needed in the art is an automatic swimming pool cleaner that debris is easily cleaned from, enhances filtering operation, and/or traversal through the pool. These and other needs are addressed by the swimming pool cleaner of the present disclosure. 
     SUMMARY OF THE DISCLOSURE 
     Example embodiments of the present disclosure relate to swimming pool cleaners having improved filters and drive systems. 
     More particularly, an improved swimming pool cleaner is provided according to embodiments of the present disclosure. In some example embodiments, the swimming pool cleaner includes a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly and/or a drive assembly having six driven brushed rollers. 
     In some example embodiments, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly is interconnected with an intake of the pool cleaner and generally includes a fluid turbine subassembly and a canister subassembly. For example, the canister subassembly is connectable with the intake of the pool cleaner and includes a canister body having a tangential outlet to an inner chamber thereof, a filtering medium (which can be, for example, a coarsely perforated surface or mesh), a fine debris container, one or more cyclone containers, and a central outlet in fluidic communication with the tangential outlet. Continuing with discussion of example embodiments, the filtering medium is positioned within the canister, the one or more cyclone containers are positioned within the filtering medium, and the fine debris container is positioned below the one or more cyclone containers. The cyclone containers each include a body having a tangential inlet, a fine debris underflow nozzle, and an overflow opening. The fluid turbine subassembly is positioned within the canister subassembly and configured to permit acceleration of fluid through the central outlet of the canister subassembly and pulling of fluid through the entirety of the canister subassembly and the intake. A motor housing includes a pump motor operatively connected to an impeller for same. Fluid being pulled through the canister subassembly and intake enters the canister body at the tangential inlet forming a cyclonic flow (e.g., a first cyclonic flow) about a first axis within the canister body and between the canister body and the filtering medium. The example first cyclonic flow includes debris-laden fluid having small and large debris, with the large debris being separated from the flow through cyclonic action and contact with the canister body and the filtering medium. The separated large debris falls to a lower portion of the canister body where it is retained. A portion of the first cyclonic flow is pulled across the filtering medium and into one or more cyclones containers. Continuing with discussions of some example embodiments, the fluid (e.g., the now once-filtered debris-laden fluid) enters the one or more cyclone containers at the respective tangential inlet, forming a cyclonic flow (e.g., a second cyclonic flow) about a second axis within each cyclone container. The second cyclonic flow includes once-filtered debris laden fluid having small debris that is separated from the fluid through contact with the cyclone container body. The debris separated in the cyclone container body falls through the underflow nozzle of each cyclone container where it is captured by the fine debris container. The fluid is then pulled out from the overflow opening of the one or more cyclone containers and ejected from the canister subassembly through the central outlet by the fluid turbine subassembly. 
     In some aspects of the present disclosure, the canister subassembly can include a vortex finder positioned within the overflow opening of each of the one or more cyclone containers that focuses slow-moving fluid so that it can be evacuated from each cyclone container. 
     In some aspects of the present disclosure, the cyclone container body can be tapered or include a tapered end that reduces the radius of the second cyclonic flow to separate decreasingly smaller particles therefrom. 
     The swimming pool cleaner can include a latch for removably retaining the hydrocyclonic particle separator in connection with the motor housing, and the hydrocyclonic particle separator can include a quick-release latch for allowing easy opening of the canister subassembly. The canister body can include a lower portion and an upper portion engaged by a hinge. The latch includes a resiliently-flexible body and a slanted head having an engagement surface, while the hydrocyclonic particle separator includes a locking interface configured to be engaged by the engagement surface of the latch. The quick-release latch can include a body having a shaped head including a latching surface at one end, a user-engageable tab at an opposite end of the shaped head, a spring, and a pivot positioned between the shaped head and the user-engageable tab. The quick-release latch is mounted to a bracket on the upper portion of the canister body by the pivot, with the spring between the user-engageable tab and the canister body. The spring biases the quick-release latch into a first latched position where the latching surface of the shaped head is adjacent and in engagement with a ridge that extends radially from the lower portion of the canister body, preventing the upper and lower portions of the canister body from being separated. Pressing the user-engageable tab compresses the spring and moves the quick-release latch into a second released position where there is clearance between the latching surface of the shaped head and the ridge, allowing the upper and lower portions of the canister body to be separated through rotation about the hinge. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, a pool cleaner is provided with six rollers for enhanced control when driven over surfaces, such as convex or concave surfaces with high local curvature, such as step edges, main drain covers, walls, and surfaces with low friction coefficients, for example. In preferred embodiments of the present disclosure, the motor housing, which can house a pump motor, houses a first drive motor and a second drive motor. In some embodiments, a first gear train operatively connects the first drive motor with a first roller set of three rollers, such that each one of the three rollers of the first roller set turn at the same rate as each other one thereof (first rate), and a second gear train operatively connects the second drive motor with a second set of three rollers, such that each one of the three rollers of the second roller set turn at the same rate as each other one thereof (the second rate). Depending upon the desired navigational outcome, for example, the first rate can be less than, greater than, and/or substantially equal to the second rate. Additionally and/or alternatively, the first set of rollers can rotate in a first direction, while the second roller set can rotate in a second direction opposite the first direction. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a canister body, a filtering medium assembly and a cyclone block. The canister body includes an inner chamber within inner walls of the canister body. The filtering medium assembly can be disposed within the inner chamber of the canister body. The cyclone block can be disposed within the inner chamber of the canister body. In some embodiments, the cyclone block can be at least partially surrounded by the filtering medium assembly. The cyclone block includes a plurality of cyclone containers. A first cyclonic flow can be generated between the inner walls of the canister body and the filtering medium assembly. A second cyclonic flow can be generated within each of the plurality of cyclone containers. 
     In some embodiments, the canister body can define a cylindrical configuration. The canister body includes a tangential inlet. The filtering medium assembly includes a filtering medium support and a filtering medium. The filtering medium assembly can be configured and dimensioned to separate large debris particles from a fluid flow during the first cyclonic flow. 
     Each of the cyclone containers includes a cylindrical cyclone chamber with a tangential inlet and a debris underflow nozzle. The cyclone containers can be radially disposed around a central axis. In some embodiments, each of the cyclone containers includes a cylindrical top portion, a frustoconical bottom portion and a debris underflow nozzle at a distal end of the cyclone container. In some embodiments, the plurality of cyclone containers can include a first set of radially disposed cyclone containers and a second set of radially disposed cyclone containers positioned around the first set of radially disposed cyclone containers. Each of the plurality of cyclone containers can be configured and dimensioned to separate small debris particles from a fluid flow during the second cyclonic flow. 
     The pool cleaner includes a large debris container hingedly connected to a bottom edge of the canister body. The large debris container can include a dish including upwardly angled side walls. The pool cleaner includes a debris separator ring disposed between the filtering medium assembly and the large debris container. The debris separator ring includes a mesh ring configured and dimensioned to maintain large debris particles within the large debris container. 
     The pool cleaner includes a fine debris container disposed within the inner chamber of the canister body. In some embodiments, the fine debris container can include a rounded dish including a central hub. In some embodiments, the fine debris container includes a dish and a central radial extension protruding from a bottom surface of the fine debris container. The central radial extension can define an inner chamber configured and dimensioned to maintain small debris particles separated from a fluid flow during the second cyclonic flow. The central radial extension can be disposed against the dish of the large debris container. The central radial extension can maintain a separation between the small debris particles within the inner chamber and large debris particles collected in the large debris container. The pool cleaner can include a gasket disposed between the dish of the large debris container and the central radial extension. The gasket can maintain separation between the small debris particles within the inner chamber and the large debris particles collected in the large debris container. Positioning the large debris container in an open position relative to the canister body simultaneously empties the large debris container and the inner chamber of the fine debris container, thereby simultaneously removing the large and small debris particles from the pool cleaner. 
     The pool cleaner can include a ring of vortex finders. Each of the vortex finders can be positioned within respective cyclone containers of the plurality of cyclone containers. The ring of vortex finders can include a central portion and a plurality of perimeter flaps Each of the perimeter flaps can include a vortex finder. In some embodiments, a top surface of the central portion can be recessed relative to surfaces of the plurality of perimeter flaps. Each of the plurality of perimeter flaps can be hingedly connected to a polygonal perimeter of the central portion. 
     The pool cleaner includes a top cap disposed over the canister body. In some embodiments, the top cap includes a plurality of radially arched tubes defining a chamber extending to an outlet of the pool cleaner. In some embodiments, the top cap includes a plurality of rounded lobes defining a chamber extending to an outlet of the pool cleaner. 
     In some embodiments, the pool cleaner includes a drive assembly including one front roller, one rear roller, and two middle rollers. In some embodiments, the pool cleaner includes a drive assembly including two front rollers, two middle rollers, and two rear rollers. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a drive assembly, a motor housing and a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly. In some embodiments, the drive assembly can include one single front roller, one single rear roller, a first middle roller and a second middle roller. The first and second middle rollers can be disposed adjacent to each other. The motor housing can be mounted relative to the drive assembly. The motor housing includes a first drive motor and a second drive motor. The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can be mounted to the motor housing. The first drive motor can drive rotation of the one single front roller and the first middle roller. The second drive motor can drive rotation of the one single rear roller and the second middle roller. The first drive motor can drive the one single front roller and the first middle roller at the same rate. The second drive motor can drive the one single rear roller and the second middle roller at the same rate. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a drive assembly, a motor housing and a hydrocyclonic particle separator. The drive assembly includes a first front roller, a second front roller, a first middle roller, a second middle roller, a first rear roller, and a second rear roller. The first and second front rollers can be disposed adjacent to each other. The first and second middle rollers can be disposed adjacent to each other. The first and second rear rollers can be disposed adjacent to each other. The motor housing can be mounted relative to the drive assembly. The motor housing includes a first drive motor and a second drive motor. The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can be mounted to the motor housing. The first drive motor can drive rotation of the first front roller, the first middle roller and the first rear roller. The second drive motor can drive rotation of the second front roller, the second middle roller and the second rear roller. The first drive motor can drive the first front roller, the first middle roller and the first rear roller at the same rate. The second drive motor can drive the second front roller, the second middle roller and the second rear roller at the same rate. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a canister body, a filter medium, a cyclone block, a sleeve, a shaft, an impeller, a top cap, and a guard (e.g., diffuser). The canister body can include an inlet, a top, and a bottom that has a central opening. The canister body can also define an inner chamber that the filter medium and cyclone block can be disposed within. The cyclone block can include a plurality of cyclone containers and a central opening. In some embodiments, the canister body can be at least partially surrounded by the filter medium. The sleeve can have a first end and a second end, and can extend through the central opening of the cyclone block and be positioned within the cyclone block such that the second end of the sleeve is adjacent the central opening of the canister body. The shaft can include a first end and a second end, and extend through the sleeve with the first end of the shaft extending from the first end of the sleeve. The impeller can be engaged with the first end of the shaft. The top cap can include an outlet and can cover the cyclone block. The guard can be engaged with the top cap and cover the top cap outlet. A first cyclonic flow can be generated between the canister body and the filtering medium assembly. A second cyclonic flow can be generated within each of the plurality of cyclone containers. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the canister body can defines a cylindrical configuration, while the inlet of the canister body can be a tangential inlet. The filter medium can include a plurality of embossments that form a plurality of pockets in the filter medium, and can be configured to separate large debris particles from a fluid flow during the first cyclonic flow. 
     Each of the cyclone containers can include a cylindrical cyclone chamber with a first tangential inlet and a debris underflow nozzle. In some embodiments of the disclosure, each of the cyclone containers include a second tangential inlet. The cyclone containers can be radially disposed around a central axis. Additionally, the cyclone containers can each include a cylindrical top portion, a frustoconical bottom portion, and a debris underflow nozzle at a distal end of the cyclone container. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the plurality of cyclone containers can include a first set of radially disposed cyclone containers and a second set of radially disposed cyclone containers that are positioned around the first set of radially disposed cyclone containers. The cyclone containers can also be radially disposed around a first central axis with the cyclone containers of the second set of radially disposed cyclone containers each having a second central axis such that the central axis of each cyclone container of the second set of radially disposed cyclone containers is at an angle with respect to the first central axis. Each of the plurality of cyclone containers can be configured to separate small debris particles from a fluid flow during the second cyclonic flow. 
     The pool cleaner can include a large debris container hingedly connected to a bottom edge of the canister body. The pool cleaner can also includes a fine debris subassembly disposed within the inner chamber of the canister body. The fine debris subassembly can include a fine debris container having a dish and a central tubular extension. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the fine debris subassembly can also include a fine debris container top having a top circular plate and a central tubular extension extending from the top circular plate that is positioned within the central tubular extension of the fine debris container. An inner chamber can be defined between the central tubular extension of the fine debris container top and the central tubular extension of the fine debris container. The inner chamber can be configured and dimensioned to maintain small debris particles separated from a fluid flow during the second cyclonic flow. 
     The pool cleaner can include a gasket positioned within the inner chamber and engaged with the central tubular extension of the fine debris container top and the central tubular extension of the fine debris container. The gasket can maintain separation between the small debris particles within the inner chamber and the large debris particles collected in the large debris container. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the large debris container can be positioned in an open position to simultaneously empty the large debris container and the inner chamber of the fine debris container. 
     The pool cleaner can also include a ring of vortex finders with each of the vortex finders positioned within respective cyclone containers of the plurality of cyclone containers. The ring of vortex finders can include a central portion and a plurality of curved protrusions that each include a vortex finder. The central portion can be recessed relative to surfaces of the plurality of curved protrusions, and each of the plurality of curved protrusions can be hingedly connected to a polygonal perimeter of the central portion. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the top cap can include a plurality of rounded lobes that define a chamber extending to the outlet. The top cap can also include a plurality of channels extending into the chamber that provide a fluid path into the chamber. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the guard (e.g., diffuser) is removably connected to the top cap. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the shaft can be rotatably engaged with the sleeve while the sleeve can be engaged with the guard. The guard, sleeve, shaft, and impeller can be removable as a single unit. 
     The pool cleaner can also include a beauty cap that has a top opening. The beauty cap can be removably positioned over the top cap and the guard with the guard extending through the top opening of the beauty cap. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a canister body, a filter medium, a cyclone block, a top cap, and an impeller subassembly. The canister body can include an inlet, a top, and a bottom that has a central opening. The canister body can also define an inner chamber that the filter medium and the cyclone block can be disposed within. The cyclone block can include a plurality of cyclone containers and a central opening. In some embodiments, the canister body can be at least partially surrounded by the filter medium. The top cap can include an outlet and can cover the cyclone block. The impeller subassembly can include a sleeve, a shaft, a retention ring, an impeller, and a guard. The sleeve can have a first end and a second end. The shaft can include a first end and a second end, and extend through the sleeve with the first end of the shaft extending from the first end of the sleeve. The shaft can be rotatable within the sleeve. The retention ring can be connected to the shaft to prevent the shaft from being removed through the central opening of the bottom of the canister body. The impeller can be engaged with the first end of the shaft. The guard can be secured to the sleeve and the top cap at the top cap outlet. A portion of the impeller subassembly can be positioned within the inner chamber of the canister body with the sleeve and shaft extending through the central opening of the cyclone block. A portion of the sleeve and shaft can be positioned within the cyclone block such that the second end of the sleeve is adjacent the central opening of the canister body. The guard can be disengaged from the top cap so that the impeller subassembly can be removed from the inner chamber of the canister body and the cyclone block as a single unit. A first cyclonic flow can be generated between the canister body and the filtering medium assembly. A second cyclonic flow can be generated within each of the plurality of cyclone containers. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the guard can be a diffuser that includes a shroud that defines an inner chamber and the impeller can be positioned within the inner chamber and radially spaced from the shroud. The shroud can include an open end having a plurality of fins, and the impeller can be axially spaced from the fins. 
     The pool cleaner can include at least one bearing positioned about the shaft and between the shaft and the sleeve. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the shaft can slide axially within the at least one bearing. The shaft can include a first coupling member configured to engage a second coupling member of a motor, and can slide axially within the at least one bearing when it engages the second coupling member and absorb any impact forces. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the sleeve can include a plurality of mounting bosses and the guard can include a plurality of mounting protrusions that can be secured with the plurality of mounting bosses in order to secure the guard to the sleeve. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the filter medium can be configured to separate large debris particles from a fluid flow during the first cyclonic flow, and each of the plurality of cyclone containers can be configured to separate small debris particles from a fluid flow during the second cyclonic flow. 
     Each of the cyclone containers can include a cylindrical cyclone chamber with a first tangential inlet and a debris underflow nozzle. In some embodiments of the disclosure, each of the cyclone containers include a second tangential inlet. The cyclone containers can be radially disposed around a central axis. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the plurality of cyclone containers can include a first set of radially disposed cyclone containers and a second set of radially disposed cyclone containers that are positioned around the first set of radially disposed cyclone containers. The cyclone containers can also be radially disposed around a first central axis with the cyclone containers of the second set of radially disposed cyclone containers each having a second central axis such that the central axis of each cyclone container of the second set of radially disposed cyclone containers is at an angle with respect to the first central axis. 
     The pool cleaner can include a large debris container hingedly connected to a bottom edge of the canister body. The pool cleaner can also includes a fine debris subassembly disposed within the inner chamber of the canister body. The fine debris subassembly can include a fine debris container having a dish and a central tubular extension. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the fine debris subassembly can also include a fine debris container top having a top circular plate and a central tubular extension extending from the top circular plate that is positioned within the central tubular extension of the fine debris container. An inner chamber can be defined between the central tubular extension of the fine debris container top and the central tubular extension of the fine debris container. The inner chamber can be configured and dimensioned to maintain small debris particles separated from a fluid flow during the second cyclonic flow. 
     The pool cleaner can include a gasket positioned within the inner chamber and engaged with the central tubular extension of the fine debris container top and the central tubular extension of the fine debris container. The gasket can maintain separation between the small debris particles within the inner chamber and the large debris particles collected in the large debris container. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the large debris container can be positioned in an open position to simultaneously empty the large debris container and the inner chamber of the fine debris container. 
     The pool cleaner can also include a ring of vortex finders with each of the vortex finders positioned within respective cyclone containers of the plurality of cyclone containers. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the top cap can include a plurality of rounded lobes that define a chamber extending to the outlet. The top cap can also include a plurality of channels extending into the chamber that provide a fluid path into the chamber. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the guard is removably connected to the top cap. 
     The pool cleaner can also include a beauty cap that has a central opening. The beauty cap can be removably positioned over the top cap and the guard with the guard extending through the central opening of the beauty cap. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary impeller subassembly for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a sleeve, a shaft, a retention ring, an impeller, and a guard. The sleeve can have a first end and a second end. The shaft can include a first end and a second end, and can be positioned within the sleeve with the first end of the shaft extending from the first end of the sleeve. The shaft can be rotatable within the sleeve. The impeller can be engaged with the first end of the shaft. The guard can be secured to the sleeve. The impeller subassembly can be removably engaged with debris container of a pool cleaner and can be removed from the debris container of the pool cleaner as a single unit. 
     In some embodiments of the disclosure, the guard is a diffuser that includes a shroud that defines an inner chamber and the impeller can be positioned within the inner chamber and radially spaced from the shroud. The shroud can include an open end having a plurality of ribs, and the impeller can be axially spaced from the fins. 
     The impeller subassembly can include at least one bearing positioned about the shaft and between the shaft and the sleeve. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the shaft can slide axially within the at least one bearing. The shaft can include a first coupling member configured to engage a second coupling member of a motor, and can slide axially within the at least one bearing when it engages the second coupling member and absorb any impact forces. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the sleeve can include a plurality of mounting bosses and the guard can include a plurality of mounting protrusions that can be secured with the plurality of mounting bosses in order to secure the guard to the sleeve. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the impeller subassembly can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a canister body, a filter medium, a cyclone block, and a check valve. The canister body can include an inlet and define an inner chamber that the filter medium and the cyclone block can be disposed within. The cyclone block can include a plurality of cyclone containers. In some embodiments, the canister body can be at least partially surrounded by the filter medium. The check valve can be secured within the inlet and can include a frame, a medium, and a rigid rod. The medium can have a proximal end, a distal end, a body that extends between the proximal end and the distal end, and a pocket in the body that extends from the proximal end to the distal end. The proximal end of the medium can be secured to the frame. The rigid rod can be positioned within the pocket of the medium. The check valve can be positioned in two different positions, a first position and a second position. The check valve is positioned in the first position when fluid is flowing through the check valve in a first direction, and positioned in the second position when fluid is flowing through the check valve in a second direction. When in the first position, debris can flow through the check valve. When in the second position, debris is prevented from flowing through the check valve. A first cyclonic flow can be generated between the canister body and the filtering medium assembly. A second cyclonic flow can be generated within each of the plurality of cyclone containers. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the inlet of the canister body can include an inner latching shoulder and the frame can include a flexible locking tab. In such embodiments, the check valve can be removably secured within the inlet through engagement of the flexible locking tab with the inner latching shoulder and can be removed from the inlet by flexing the flexible locking tab to disengage the flexible locking tab and the inner latching shoulder. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, when the check valve is in the first position the rigid rod is substantially horizontal and does not obstruct the frame with the medium, while when the check valve is in the second position the rigid rod is substantially vertical adjacent the frame and obstructs the frame with the medium. The medium can be constructed of a flexible mesh material, and can be sewn around the frame or overmolded to the frame. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary check valve is provided that includes a frame, a medium, and a rigid rod. The medium can have a proximal end, a distal end, a body that extends between the proximal end and the distal end, and a pocket in the body that extends from the proximal end to the distal end. The proximal end of the medium can be secured to the frame. The rigid rod can be positioned within the pocket of the medium. The check valve can be positioned in two different positions, a first position and a second position. The check valve is positioned in the first position when fluid is flowing through the check valve in a first direction, and positioned in the second position when fluid is flowing through the check valve in a second direction. When in the first position, debris can flow through the check valve. When in the second position, debris is prevented from flowing through the check valve. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the check valve can include a flexible locking tab that is configured to releasably secure the check valve within an inlet of a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, when the check valve is in the first position the rigid rod is substantially horizontal and does not obstruct the frame with the medium, while when the check valve is in the second position the rigid rod is substantially vertical adjacent the frame and obstructs the frame with the medium. The medium can be constructed of a flexible mesh material, and can be sewn around the frame or overmolded to the frame. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the check valve can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary filter medium is provided that includes a body and a first plurality of embossments formed in the body. The body can have a first side and a second side, and be formed of a filter material. The first plurality of embossments can form a first plurality of convexities extending from the first side of the body and a first plurality of concavities extending into the second side of the body. The first plurality of concavities and the first plurality of convexities can provide flow channels for water to flow through when debris is attached to the body. 
     The filter medium can include a second set of embossments formed in the body. The second set of embossments can form a second plurality of convexities extending from the second side of the body and a second plurality of concavities extending into the first side of the body. The first and second plurality of concavities and the first and second plurality of convexities can provide flow channels for water to flow through when debris is attached to the body. In some embodiments of the disclosure, the first and second plurality of embossments can be formed in the body such that the convexities of the first plurality of convexities of the first plurality of embossments are adjacent to the concavities of the second plurality of concavities of the second plurality of embossments, and the convexities of the second plurality of convexities of the second plurality of embossments are adjacent the concavities of the first plurality of concavities of the first plurality of embossments. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure the filter medium can be a fabric mesh, a plastic mesh, a molded mesh, a foam, or a coarse screening media. Additionally, the filter medium body can have an arcuate shape and can be configured to be connected to a support structure. The filter medium can also be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a body, a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly, and a handle. The body includes a chassis that has a first catch and a second catch. The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can be positioned on the chassis between the first catch and the second catch. The handle has a body, a first locking hook, and a second locking hook. The body of the handle can have a first end and a second end, with the first locking hook extending from the first end and the second locking hook extending from the second end. The handle can be rotatably engaged with the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly such that it can be rotated between an unlocked position and a locked position. When in the unlocked position, the first and second locking hooks are disengaged from the first and second catches and the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can be removed from the chassis. When in the locked position the first and second locking hooks are engaged with the first and second catches and the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly is secured to the chassis. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first and second locking hooks can include a recess and an engagement surface, and a portion of the first and second catches can be positioned within the recesses and engage the engagement surfaces of the first and second locking hooks when the handle is positioned in the locked position. In other embodiments of the present disclosure, the first and second catches can include a recess and an engagement surface, and a portion of the first and second locking hooks can be positioned within the recesses and engage the engagement surfaces of the first and second catches when the handle is positioned in the locked position. 
     The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can include a first engagement tab and a second engagement tab, and the handle can be rotatably engaged with the first and second engagement tabs. Additionally, the handle can include a first mounting boss and a second mounting boss, such that the first mounting boss can be rotatably engaged with the first engagement tab while the second mounting boss can be rotatably engaged with the second engagement tab. The first mounting boss can include a first channel, the second mounting boss can include a second channel, the first engagement tab can include a first protrusion, and the second engagement tab can include a second protrusion. When the handle is in the unlocked position the first protrusion can be positioned within the first channel and the second protrusion can be positioned within the second channel. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the handle can include a plurality of locking tabs and the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly can include a plurality of notches. The plurality of flexible locking tabs can be engaged with the plurality of notches when the handle is in the locked position. 
     The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can include a first pair of guide vanes separated by a first channel and a second pair of guide vanes separated by a second channel. The first channel can receive the first catch or the second catch and the second channel can receive the other of the first catch or the second catch in order to position the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly on the chassis. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a body and a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly. The body includes a chassis that has a first catch and a second catch. The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly includes a canister body, a filter medium, a cyclone block, a first engagement tab, a second engagement tab, and a handle. The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can be positioned on the chassis. The canister body can include an inlet and define an inner chamber that the filter medium and the cyclone block can be disposed within. The cyclone block can include a plurality of cyclone containers. In some embodiments, the canister body can be at least partially surrounded by the filter medium. The handle has a body, a first locking hook, and a second locking hook. The body of the handle can have a first end and a second end, with the first locking hook extending from the first end and the second locking hook extending from the second end. The handle can be rotatably engaged with the first and second engagement tabs of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly such that it can be rotated between an unlocked position and a locked position. When in the unlocked position, the first and second locking hooks are disengaged from the first and second catches and the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can be removed from the chassis. When in the locked position the first and second locking hooks are engaged with the first and second catches and the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly is secured to the chassis. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first and second locking hooks can include a recess and an engagement surface, and a portion of the first and second catches can be positioned within the recesses and engage the engagement surfaces of the first and second locking hooks when the handle is positioned in the locked position. In other embodiments of the present disclosure, the first and second catches can include a recess and an engagement surface, and a portion of the first and second locking hooks can be positioned within the recesses and engage the engagement surfaces of the first and second catches when the handle is positioned in the locked position. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the handle can include a first mounting boss and a second mounting boss, such that the first mounting boss can be rotatably engaged with the first engagement tab while the second mounting boss can be rotatably engaged with the second engagement tab. The first mounting boss can include a first channel, the second mounting boss can include a second channel, the first engagement tab can include a first protrusion, and the second engagement tab can include a second protrusion. When the handle is in the unlocked position the first protrusion can be positioned within the first channel and the second protrusion can be positioned within the second channel. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the handle can include a plurality of locking tabs and the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly can include a plurality of notches. The plurality of flexible locking tabs can be engaged with the plurality of notches when the handle is in the locked position. 
     The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly can include a first pair of guide vanes separated by a first channel and a second pair of guide vanes separated by a second channel. The first channel can receive the first catch or the second catch and the second channel can receive the other of the first catch or the second catch in order to position the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly on the chassis. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a chassis, a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly mounted to the chassis, a first roller set, a second roller set, a first roller drive gear train, a second roller drive gear train, a first roller drive gear box, a second roller drive gear box, and a motor box. The chassis can have a motor box housing, a first drive gear box housing, and a second drive gear box housing. The first roller drive gear train can be in mechanical communication with the first roller set, and the second roller drive gear train can be in mechanical communication with the second roller set. The first roller drive gear box can include a housing and a first gear stack secured within the housing. The first roller drive gear box can also be removably mounted within the first drive gear box housing and in mechanical communication with the first roller drive gear train. The second roller drive gear box can include a housing and a second gear stack secured within the housing. The second roller drive gear box can be removably mounted within the second drive gear box housing and in mechanical communication with the second roller drive gear train. The motor box can include a first drive motor and a second drive motor. The motor box can be mounted within the motor box housing with the first drive motor in mechanical communication with the first gear stack and the second drive motor in mechanical communication with the second gear stack. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first and second drive gear box housings can include sidewalls, and the first and second first and second roller drive gear boxes can include sidewalls that match the sidewalls of the first and second drive gear box housings in order to align the first and second roller drive gear boxes when they are positioned within the first and second drive gear box housings. The first and second drive gear box housings can also include a plurality of mounts, while the first and second first and second roller drive gear boxes include a plurality of mounting tabs that align with the mounts, which positions the first and second roller drive gear boxes within the first and second drive gear box housings. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first and second roller drive gear boxes can include a removable lid that is secured to the housing, and the first and gear stacks are accessible when the lid is removed from the housing. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the housing can include an opening and the first roller drive gear train can include a first drive gear. In such embodiments, a gear of the first gear stack can extend out from the opening in the housing and drive rotation of the first drive gear of the first roller drive gear train, and a gear of the second gear stack can extend out from the opening in the housing and drive rotation of a second drive gear of the second roller drive gear train. 
     The pool cleaner can include a first axle and a second axle. The first axle can be engaged and rotate with the first drive gear and the gear of the first gear stack, which drive rotation of the first axle. The second axle can be engaged and rotate with the second drive gear and the gear of the second gear stack, which drives rotation of the second axle. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first roller set can include a first front roller, a first middle roller, and a first rear roller. The first drive motor can drive the first front roller, the first middle roller, and the first rear roller at the same rate. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the second roller set includes a second front roller, a second middle roller, and a second rear roller. The second drive motor can drive the second front roller, the second middle roller, and the second rear roller at the same rate. 
     In other embodiments of the present disclosure, first roller set includes a first front roller, a first middle roller, and a first rear roller, while the second roller set includes a second front roller, a second middle roller, and a second rear roller; and the first and second front rollers are disposed adjacent to each other, the first and second middle rollers are disposed adjacent to each other, and the first and second rear rollers are disposed adjacent to each other. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first drive motor drives the first front roller, the first middle roller, and the first rear roller at a first rate, and the second drive motor drives the second front roller, the second middle roller, and the second rear roller at a second rate that is different than the first rate to cause the pool cleaner to turn. In other embodiments of the present disclosure, the first drive motor drives the first front roller, the first middle roller, and the first rear roller in a first rotational direction, and the second drive motor drives the second front roller, the second middle roller, and the second rear roller in a second rotational direction that is different than the first rotational direction to cause the pool cleaner to turn. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a chassis, a first roller, and a roller latch. The chassis has an enclosure wall that defines a roller housing, and at least one latch receiver that includes an arcuate slot having an opening and a track. The first roller has a first side including a mounting boss, and a second side. The first roller is positioned within the roller housing and is rotatably mounted to the chassis at the second side. The roller latch has a body, at least one mounting protrusion, and a rider. The body of the roller latch includes a first side, a second side, and an arcuate transverse surface extending between the first side and the second side. The mounting protrusion extends laterally from one of the first and second sides of the body and includes a rotational axis. The rider includes a neck and a head, and extends from the arcuate transverse surface of the body. The rider can be generally arcuate in shape. The mounting boss can be rotatably engaged with the mounting protrusion so that the roller latch can be rotated about the rotational axis into a latched position where the neck is positioned within the track and the roller latch is secured to the at least one latch receiver. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, when the roller latch is rotated into the latched position the head passes through the opening and the neck passes through the track. 
     The pool cleaner can also include a fastener, while the roller latch can include a locking tab and the latch receiver can include a mounting boss. When the roller latch is in the latched position the fastener can engage the locking tab and the mounting boss to secure the roller latch in the latched position. 
     The pool cleaner can also include a second roller that has a first side including a mounting boss, and a second side. The first roller is positioned within the roller housing and is rotatably mounted to the chassis at the second side. The roller latch can include a second mounting protrusion that extends laterally from one of the first and second sides of the body, and the mounting boss of the second roller can be rotatably engaged with the second mounting protrusion. The second roller can be positioned adjacent the first roller in the roller housing. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the roller latch can include a second mounting protrusion extending laterally from one of the first and second sides of the body, and the latch receiver can include a mount. The second mounting protrusion can be positioned within the mount. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary roller latch for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a body, at least one mounting protrusion, and a rider. The body of the roller latch includes a first side, a second side, and an arcuate transverse surface extending between the first side and the second side. The mounting protrusion extends laterally from one of the first and second sides of the body and includes a rotational axis. The rider includes a neck and a head, and extends from the arcuate transverse surface of the body. The rider can be generally arcuate in shape. The mounting protrusion can be rotatably engaged with a mounting boss of roller so that the roller latch can be rotated about the rotational axis into a latched position. The rider can engage a slot of a latch receiver as the body is rotated about the rotational axis to secure the roller latch to the latch receiver in a latched position. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, when the roller latch is rotated into the latched position the head passes through an opening and the neck passes through a track. 
     The roller latch can include a locking tab that can be engaged with a mounting boss of the latch receiver by a fastener. 
     The roller latch can include a second mounting protrusion that extends laterally from one of the first and second sides of the body. The second mounting protrusion can be engaged with a mounting boss of a second roller mount of the latch receiver. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the roller latch can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary roller assembly for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a first cage half and a second cage half. The first cage half includes a bottom portion defining a first mating surface. The bottom portion includes a first tab including a distal end and a proximal end, the distal end including a snap engaging end. The bottom portion includes a protrusion extending from an inner surface of the first cage half. The second cage half includes a bottom portion defining a second mating surface configured to mate against the first mating surface. The bottom portion includes a second tab including a distal end and a proximal end, the distal end including a snap engaging end. During assembly, the snap engaging end of the first tab interlocks against the proximal end of the second tab, the snap engaging end of the second tab interlocks against the proximal end of the first tab, and the protrusion engages an inner surface of the second cage half. Engagement of the protrusion with the inner surface of the second cage half limits disengagement of the first and second tabs during impact to the roller assembly. 
     The first cage half and the second cage half each include a top portion defining a substantially curved surface. The top portions can include a plurality of openings extending therethrough. In some embodiments, the snap engaging end of the first tab can be oriented substantially inwardly towards a central longitudinal axis of the first cage half. In some embodiments, the snap engaging end of the second tab can be oriented substantially outwardly away from a central longitudinal axis of the second cage half. During assembly, the first tab can be positioned over and mates against the second tab. 
     The first tab and the protrusion can be disposed on a first connecting edge of the bottom portion of the first cage half. The second tab can be disposed on a complementary first connecting edge of the bottom portion of the second cage half. The first cage half includes a second connecting edge and the second cage half includes a complementary second connecting edge. The second connecting edge of the first cage half includes two spaced protrusions extending from the inner surface of the first cage half. The complementary second connecting edge of the second cage half includes a protrusion extending from the inner surface of the second cage half. During assembly, the protrusion of the second cage half is received between the two spaced protrusions of the first cage half, the protrusion of the second cage half engages the inner surface of the first cage half, and the two spaced protrusions of the first cage half engage the inner surface of the second cage half. 
     The first cage half and the second cage half each include first and second side surfaces. The first side surface of the second cage half includes a third tab with a snap engaging end. The first side surface of the first cage half includes a slot configured to receive at least a portion of the third tab of the second cage half. The snap engaging end of the third tab can interlock against an edge of the slot. The first side surfaces of the first and second cage halves mate to form a mounting boss. The second side surfaces of the first and second cage halves mate such that the second side surfaces are configured to receive a roller mount (e.g., a gear). 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the roller assembly can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary method of assembling a roller is provided. The method includes providing a first cage half including a bottom portion defining a first mating surface. The bottom portion includes a first tab including a distal end and a proximal end, the distal end including a snap engaging end, and a protrusion extending from an inner surface of the first cage half. The method includes providing a second cage half including a bottom portion defining a second mating surface configured to mate against the first mating surface. The bottom portion includes a second tab including a distal end and a proximal end, the distal end including a snap engaging end. The method includes interlocking the snap engaging end of the first tab against the proximal end of the second tab. The method includes interlocking the snap engaging end of the second tab against the proximal end of the first tab. The method includes engaging an inner surface of the second cage half with the protrusion of the first cage half. 
     The method includes positioning and mating the first tab against the second tab. The first tab and the protrusion are disposed on a first connecting edge of the bottom portion of the first cage half, and the second tab is disposed on a complementary first connecting edge of the bottom portion of the second cage half. The first cage half includes a second connecting edge and the second cage half includes a complementary second connecting edge. The second connecting edge of the first cage half includes two spaced protrusions extending from the inner surface of the first cage half. The complementary second connecting edge of the second cage half includes a protrusion extending from the inner surface of the second cage half. The method includes positioning the protrusion of the second cage half between the two spaced protrusions of the first cage half. The method includes engaging the inner surface of the first cage half with the protrusion of the second cage half. The method includes comprising engaging the inner surface of the second cage half with the two spaced protrusions of the first cage half. 
     The first cage half and the second cage half each include first and second side surfaces. The first side surface of the second cage half includes a third tab with a snap engaging end, and the first side surface of the first cage half includes a slot configured to receive at least a portion of the third tab of the second cage half. The method includes interlocking the snap engaging end of the third tab against an edge of the slot. The method includes mating the first side surfaces of the first and second cage halves to form a mounting boss. 
     The method includes providing a roller cover including a first end and a second end. The first end includes one or more openings configured to receive the first tab and the protrusion of the first cage half, and the second end includes one or more openings configured to receive the second tab of the second cage half. The method includes passing the first tab and the protrusion of the first cage half through the one or more openings of the first end of the roller cover. The method includes passing the second tab of the second cage half through the one or more openings of the second end of the roller cover. The method includes rolling the first and second halves toward each other such that top surfaces of the first and second cage halves mate with the roller cover. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary roller assembly for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a first cage half, a second cage half, and a roller cover. The first cage half includes a bottom portion defining a first mating surface. The bottom portion includes a first tab including a distal end and a proximal end, the distal end including a snap engaging end, and a protrusion extending from an inner surface of the first cage half. The second cage half includes a bottom portion defining a second mating surface configured to mate against the first mating surface. The bottom portion includes a second tab including a distal end and a proximal end, the distal end including a snap engaging end. The roller cover includes a first end and a second end. The first end includes one or more openings configured to receive the first tab and the protrusion of the first cage half, and the second end includes one or more openings configured to receive the second tab of the second cage half. 
     During assembly, the first tab and the protrusion of the first cage half are passed through the one or more openings of the first end of the roller cover, the second tab of the second cage half is passed through the one or more openings of the second end of the roller cover, and the first and second cage halves are rolled toward each other such that top surfaces of the first and second cage halves mate with the roller cover. Further, during assembly, the snap engaging end of the first tab interlocks against the proximal end of the second tab, the snap engaging end of the second tab interlocks against the proximal end of the first tab, and the protrusion engages an inner surface of the second cage half. 
     In some embodiments, the roller cover can define a planar, flexible body extending between the first and second ends. The roller cover includes an outer surface and an inner surface. The inner surface is configured to mate against the top surfaces of the first and second cage halves. The outer surface includes a plurality of traction elements (e.g., flaps, or the like) extending therefrom. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the roller assembly can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary roller assembly is provided that includes a first cage half and a second cage half. The first cage half includes a first connecting edge and a second connecting edge having two spaced protrusions extending from an inner surface of the first cage half. The second cage half includes a first connecting edge and a second connecting edge having a protrusion extending from an inner surface of the second cage half. During assembly, the protrusion of the second cage half is received between the two spaced protrusions of the first cage half, the protrusion of the second cage half engages the inner surface of the first cage half, the two spaced protrusions of the first cage half engage the inner surface of the second cage half, and the first connecting edge is secured to the second connecting edge. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a chassis, a motor box, a pump motor, and a debris container. The chassis has a motor box housing, and the motor box is mounted within the motor box housing. The pump motor, which can be a brushless DC outer rotor motor, is positioned within the motor box and has a rotor including a first coupling member that extends out from the motor box. The debris container has a rotatable shaft that has a first end and a second end, and an impeller mounted to the first end of the rotatable shaft. The second end of the rotatable shaft can include a second coupling member that can receive the first coupling member of the pump motor. The debris container is mounted on the chassis with the first coupling member engaged with the second coupling member, and the pump motor drives rotation of the rotatable shaft through engagement of the first coupling member with the second member. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure the first coupling member is an external spline member and the second coupling member is an internal spline member, while in other embodiments, the first coupling member is a first blender coupler and the second coupling member is a second blender coupler. The debris container can also include a sleeve that surrounds the rotatable shaft, and the pump motor can include a guide fillet. The sleeve can engage the guide fillet to center the rotatable shaft with the pump motor. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a chassis, a motor box, a pump motor, and a debris container. The chassis has a motor box housing, and the motor box is mounted within the motor box housing. The pump motor, which can be a brushless DC outer rotor motor, is positioned within the motor box and has a rotor including a first magnetic member that extends out from the motor box. The debris container has a rotatable shaft that has a first end and a second end, and an impeller mounted to the first end of the rotatable shaft. The second end of the rotatable shaft can include a second magnetic member that can magnetically couple to the first magnetic member of the pump motor. The debris container is mounted on the chassis with the first magnetic member engaged with the second magnetic member, and the pump motor drives rotation of the rotatable shaft through engagement of the first magnetic member with the second magnetic member. 
     The debris container can also includes a sleeve that surrounds the rotatable shaft, and the pump motor can include a guide fillet. The sleeve can engage the guide fillet to center the rotatable shaft with the pump motor. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a chassis, a motor box, a stator, and a debris container. The chassis has a motor box housing, and the motor box is mounted within the motor box housing. The stator is positioned within the motor box and includes a plurality of electromagnets. The debris container has a rotatable shaft that has a first end and a second end, and an impeller mounted to the first end of the rotatable shaft. The second end of the rotatable shaft can include a casing having a plurality of permanent magnets. The casing can be placed over or inside the stator. The debris container is mounted on the chassis with the stator positioned within the casing of the rotatable shaft, and the stator drives rotation of the rotatable shaft through electromechanical interaction between the plurality of electromagnets of the stator with the plurality of permanent magnets of the casing. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the casing can extend from a bottom of the debris container and can be positioned within the motor box when the debris container is mounted on the chassis. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a chassis, a motor box, an inductive coupling transmitter circuit, and a debris container. The chassis has a motor box housing, and the motor box is mounted within the motor box housing. The inductive coupling transmitter circuit is positioned within the motor box. The debris container has a pump motor, a rotatable shaft that has a first end and a second end, and an impeller mounted to the first end of the rotatable shaft. The pump motor, which can be a brushless DC outer rotor motor, has an inductive coupling receiver circuit and rotatably drives the rotatable shaft. The debris container is mounted on the chassis with the inductive coupling receiver circuit positioned adjacent the inductive coupling transmitter circuit. The inductive coupling receiver circuit receives electrical power from the inductive coupling transmitter circuit and provides the pump motor with electrical power to drive rotation of the rotatable shaft. The debris container can also include a sleeve that the pump motor and rotatable shaft can be positioned within. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, an exemplary pool cleaner is provided that includes a chassis, a motor box, a power circuit, and debris container. The chassis has a motor box housing, and the motor box is mounted within the motor box housing. The power circuit is positioned within the motor box and includes a plurality of pins, e.g., spring-loaded pogo pins, that extend out from the motor box. The debris container has a pump motor, a rotatable shaft that has a first end and a second end, and an impeller mounted to the first end of the rotatable shaft. The pump motor, which can be a brushless DC outer rotor motor, has a contact plate and rotatably drives the rotatable shaft. The debris container is mounted on the chassis with the contact plate engaging the pins. The contact plate receives electrical power from the pins and provides the pump motor with electrical power to drive rotation of the rotatable shaft. The debris container can also include a sleeve that the pump motor and rotatable shaft can be positioned within. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a power supply for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a housing, a user interface, a low-power user interface printed circuit board, and a potted power converter board assembly. The low-power user interface printed circuit board is in electrical communication with the user interface. The potted power converter board assembly includes a tray, a high-power printed circuit board, an AC power input connector, a female power and communication output port, and a potting compound. The high-power printed circuit board is positioned within the tray and includes a plurality of electrical components and low-power user interface wires. The AC power input connector is in electrical communication with the high-power printed circuit board and provides a power input to the high-power printed circuit board. The female power and communication output port is in electrical communication with the high-power printed circuit board and provides power output from the high-power printed circuit board. The potting compound is positioned within the tray and surrounds the high-power circuit board and the electrical components, thus isolating the high-power circuit board and the electrical components. The low-power user interface wires extend out from the potting compound and are connected to the low-power user interface printed circuit board. The low-power user interface wires provide power to the low-power user interface printed circuit board. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the housing can include a front housing and a rear housing, and the low-power user interface printed circuit board and the potted power converter board assembly can be positioned between the front housing and the rear housing. The low-power user interface printed circuit board can be mounted to the front housing, and the potted power converter board assembly can include a plurality of stops extending between the tray and the front housing that restrict flexion of the low-power user interface printed circuit board. Furthermore, the potted power converter board assembly can include a plurality of mounting brackets while the rear housing can include a plurality of mounting bosses. The potted power converter board assembly can be retained by the rear housing through engagement of the plurality of mounting brackets with the plurality of mounting bosses of the rear housing. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the high-power printed circuit board can include a first side, a second side, and a heat sink, which can be a folded sheet metal heat sink. The plurality of electrical components can be mounted to the first side while the heat sink can be mounted to the second side. 
     The user interface can be mounted to the housing with the connector extending through a connector opening in the housing so that it can connect to the low-power user interface printed circuit board. A graphic overlay including a plurality of semi-transparent indicia can be positioned over the user interface. 
     The power supply can include low-power fan wires and a fan. The low-power fan wires can be connected to the high-power printed circuit board, extend out from the potting compound, and be connected to the fan in order to provide low-power to the fan. The fan is positioned adjacent the potting compound and cools the potted power converter board assembly through forced convection. The housing can include a fan opening with the fan positioned within the fan opening. The fan can be secured in place by a fan cover that is removably connected to the housing and covers the fan opening. 
     The tray can include a port opening while the female power and communication output port includes a barrier that can be positioned within the port opening to prevent potting compound from leaking out from the tray. 
     The user interface printed circuit board can include a plurality of light-emitting diodes, and the housing can include a plurality of openings that allow the light-emitting diodes to be viewed from the exterior of the housing. The power supply can also include a light baffle that includes a plurality of apertures. The light baffle can be positioned over the user interface printed circuit board with the light-emitting diodes positioned within the apertures, such that the light baffle prevents cross-talk between the light-emitting diodes. 
     The housing can include, among other things, a recessed handle and a plurality of vents on the sides of the housing that are positioned to vent hot air away from the handle. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the electrical components of the high-power printed circuit board can form a contoured landscape, and the contoured tray can include a plurality of contours that define a plurality of interior recesses. The contours of the tray can match the contoured landscape formed by the electrical components of the high-power printed circuit board, so that when the high-power printed circuit board is positioned within the tray the electrical components are positioned within the interior recesses of the contoured tray. A substantially uniform space, which is filled with potting compound, can be formed between the plurality of electrical components and the plurality of contours of the tray. The substantially uniform space can provide substantially unified strain during thermal expansion of the potting compound. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the high-power printed circuit board limits the power provided to the low-power printed circuit board. For example, the high-power printed circuit board can include a positive temperature coefficient thermistor can limit the power provided to the low-power printed circuit board to less than or equal to a predefined wattage. 
     The power supply can also include a control cable that extends from a pool cleaner and is connected to the female power and communication output port, and which provides power and control commands to the pool cleaner. The high-power printed circuit board can also include a thermistor that provides a measurement of the temperature of the high-power printed circuit board, and the pool cleaner can adjust its operation based on the temperature of the high-power printed circuit board. For example, the pool cleaner can reduce the power drawn from the power supply if the temperature monitored by the thermistor is greater than a threshold, or disable operating modes thereof if the temperature monitored by the thermistor is greater than a threshold. 
     The user interface can include a first button, a second button, and a third button. The first button can be a power button, the second button can be a schedule select button, and the third button can be a mode select button. A factory reset can be performed by pressing and holding the first button, the second button, and the third button for a predetermined period of time. A WiFi connection of the power supply can be reset by pressing and holding at least two of the first, second, and third buttons simultaneously for a predetermined period of time. The power button of the user interface can be pressed to toggle the power supply between a power state and a standby state. The power button can also be pressed and held for a predetermined period of time to start or shut-down a pool cleaner connected to the power supply. The schedule select button of the user interface can be pressed to scroll through schedule settings. The schedule select button can also be pressed and held for a predetermined period of time to dim the user interface. The mode select button of the user interface can be pressed to scroll through a plurality of pool cleaner modes. The mode select button can also be pressed and held for a predetermined period of time to brighten the user interface. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the power supply can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a power supply for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a housing, a user interface including a connector, a low-power user interface printed circuit board, and a potted power converter board assembly. The low-power user interface printed circuit board has a microprocessor, a power converter board connector, and a user interface port. The user interface connector of the user interface is connected to the user interface port of the low-power user interface printed circuit board to communicate therewith. The potted power converter board assembly includes a high-power printed circuit board, a contoured tray, an AC power input connector, a female power and communication output port, and a potting compound. The high-power printed circuit board is positioned within the contoured tray and includes a plurality of electrical components that form a contoured landscape, and low-power user interface wires. The contoured tray includes a plurality of contours that define a plurality of interior recesses. The contours of the contoured tray match the contoured landscape formed by the electrical components of the high-power printed circuit board, so that when the high-power printed circuit board is positioned within the tray the electrical components are positioned within the interior recesses of the contoured tray. The AC power input connector is in electrical communication with the high-power printed circuit board and provides a power input to the high-power printed circuit board. The female power and communication output port is in electrical communication with the high-power printed circuit board and provides power output from the high-power printed circuit board and control from the low power user interface printed circuit board. The potting compound is positioned within the tray and surrounds the high-power circuit board and the electrical components, thus isolating the high-power circuit board and the electrical components. The low-power user interface wires extend out from the potting compound and can be connected to the power converter board connector. The low-power user interface printed circuit board and the potted power converter board assembly are positioned within the housing. 
     A substantially uniform space, which is filled with potting compound, can be formed between the plurality of electrical components and the plurality of contours of the contoured tray. The substantially uniform space can provide substantially unified strain during thermal expansion of the potting compound. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the housing can include a front housing and a rear housing, and the low-power user interface printed circuit board and the potted power converter board assembly can be positioned between the front housing and the rear housing. The low-power user interface printed circuit board can be mounted to the front housing, and the potted power converter board assembly can include a plurality of stops extending between the tray and the front housing that restriction flexion of the low-power user interface printed circuit board. Furthermore, the potted power converter board assembly can include a plurality of mounting brackets while the rear housing can include a plurality of mounting bosses. The potted power converter board assembly can be retained by the rear housing through engagement of the plurality of mounting brackets with the plurality of mounting bosses of the rear housing. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the high-power printed circuit board can include a first side, a second side, and a heat sink, which can be a folded sheet metal heat sink. The plurality of electrical components can be mounted to the first side while the heat sink can be mounted to the second side. 
     The user interface can be mounted to the housing with the connector extending through a connector opening in the housing so that it can connect to the user interface port of the low-power user interface printed circuit board. A graphic overlay including a plurality of semi-transparent indicia can be positioned over the user interface. 
     The power supply can include low-power fan wires and a fan. The low-power fan wires can be connected to the high-power printed circuit board, extend out from the potting compound, and be connected to the fan in order to provide low-power to the fan. The fan is positioned adjacent the potting compound and cools the potted power converter board assembly through forced convection. The housing can include a fan opening with the fan positioned within the fan opening. The fan can be secured in place by a fan cover that is removably connected to the housing and covers the fan opening. 
     The tray can include a port opening while the female power and communication output port includes a barrier that can be positioned within the port opening to prevent potting compound from leaking out from the tray. 
     The user interface printed circuit board can include a plurality of light-emitting diodes, and the housing can include a plurality of openings that allow the light-emitting diodes to be viewed from the exterior of the housing. The power supply can also include a light baffle that includes a plurality of apertures. The light baffle can be positioned over the user interface printed circuit board with the light-emitting diodes positioned within the apertures, such that the light baffle prevents cross-talk between the light-emitting diodes. 
     The housing can include, among other things, a recessed handle and a plurality of vents on sides of the housing that are positioned to vent hot air away from the handle. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the high-power printed circuit board limits the power provided to the low-power printed circuit board. For example, the high-power printed circuit board can include a positive temperature coefficient thermistor can limit the power provided to the low-power printed circuit board to less than or equal to a predefined wattage. 
     The power supply can also include a control cable that extends from a pool cleaner and is connected to the female power and communication output port, and which provides power and control commands to the pool cleaner. The high-power printed circuit board can also include a thermistor that provides a measurement of the temperature of the high-power printed circuit board, and the pool cleaner can adjust its operation based on the temperature of the high-power printed circuit board. For example, the pool cleaner can draw less power if the temperature monitored by the thermistor is greater than a threshold, or disable operating modes thereof if the temperature monitored by the thermistor is greater than a threshold. 
     The user interface can include a first button, a second button, and a third button. The first button can be a power button, the second button can be a schedule select button, and the third button can be a mode select button. A factory reset can be performed by pressing and holding the first button, the second button, and the third button for a predetermined period of time. A WiFi connection of the power supply can be reset by pressing and holding at least two of the first, second, and third buttons simultaneously for a predetermined period of time. The power button of the user interface can be pressed to toggle the power supply between a power state and a standby state. The power button can also be pressed and held for a predetermined period of time to start or shut-down a pool cleaner connected to the power supply. The schedule select button of the user interface can be pressed to scroll through schedule settings. The schedule select button can also be pressed and held for a predetermined period of time to dim the user interface. The mode select button of the user interface can be pressed to scroll through a plurality of pool cleaner modes. The mode select button can also be pressed and held for a predetermined period of time to brighten the user interface. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the power supply can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a power supply for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a housing, a high-power printed circuit board positioned within the housing, and a kickstand. The housing defines an internal chamber, and includes a rear wall that has at least one kickstand engagement. The at least one kickstand engagement includes a lower abutment and an upper abutment, with the lower abutment having a stop. The kickstand includes at least one leg having a first end and a second end. An engagement surface is positioned at the second end of the leg, and a locking protrusion extends from the leg at a position between the first end and the second end. The locking protrusion includes a body and an extension extending from the body. The locking protrusion is removably positioned within the lower abutment and can rotate within the lower abutment in order to rotatably secure the kickstand to the housing. The kickstand is rotatable between a closed position and an open position. When the kickstand is in the open position the extension engages the stop and the engagement surface engages the upper abutment to prevent further rotation of the kickstand. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the lower abutment includes a first curved support, a second curved support, and a channel between the first and second curved supports. The locking protrusion can be positioned between the first and second curved supports with the extension positioned within the channel. When the kickstand is rotated from the closed position to the open position the extension is rotated across the channel to engage the stop. Additionally, the first and second curved supports can each include a sidewall and the locking protrusion can be positioned between the sidewalls with the sidewalls preventing lateral movement of the kickstand. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the lower abutment includes a protrusion that engages the body of the locking protrusion in order to secure the locking protrusion within the lower abutment. The rear wall of the housing can include a window and the at least one kickstand engagement can extend into the internal chamber of the housing. The window can be positioned adjacent the at least one kickstand engagement and provide access to the at least one kickstand engagement. The upper abutment can include a curved body that has an attachment end and an open end, and defines an engagement chamber. The curved body can be connected to the rear wall at the attachment end. In such embodiments, when the kickstand is in the open position the engagement surface is positioned within the engagement chamber and engages the curved body of the upper abutment. The curved body can also engage the locking protrusion body in order to further secure the locking protrusion within the lower abutment. The curved body can include an angled stop positioned within the engagement chamber. The engagement surface can engage the angled stop when the kickstand is in the open position. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the power supply can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a power supply for a pool cleaner is provided that includes a housing and a kickstand. The housing defines an internal chamber, and includes a rear wall that has at least one kickstand engagement. The at least one kickstand engagement includes a lower abutment and an upper abutment, with the lower abutment having a stop. The kickstand includes at least one leg having a first end and a second end. An engagement surface is positioned at the second end of the leg, and a locking protrusion extends from the leg at a position between the first end and the second end. The locking protrusion includes a body and an extension extending from the body. The locking protrusion is removably positioned within the lower abutment and can rotate within the lower abutment in order to rotatably secure the kickstand to the housing. The kickstand is rotatable between a closed position and an open position. When the kickstand is in the open position the extension engages the stop and the engagement surface engages the upper abutment to prevent further rotation of the kickstand. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the lower abutment includes a first curved support, a second curved support, and a channel between the first and second curved supports. The locking protrusion can be positioned between the first and second curved supports with the extension positioned within the channel. When the kickstand is rotated from the closed position to the open position the extension is rotated across the channel to engage the stop. Additionally, the first and second curved supports can each include a sidewall and the locking protrusion can be positioned between the sidewalls with the sidewalls preventing lateral movement of the kickstand. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the lower abutment includes a protrusion that engages the body of the locking protrusion in order to secure the locking protrusion within the lower abutment. The rear wall of the housing can include a window and the at least one kickstand engagement can extend into the internal chamber of the housing. The window can be positioned adjacent the at least one kickstand engagement and provide access to the at least one kickstand engagement. The upper abutment can include a curved body that has an attachment end and an open end, and defines an engagement chamber. The curved body can be connected to the rear wall at the attachment end. In such embodiments, when the kickstand is in the open position the engagement surface is positioned within the engagement chamber and engages the curved body of the upper abutment. The curved body can also engage the locking protrusion body in order to further secure the locking protrusion within the lower abutment. The curved body can include an angled stop positioned within the engagement chamber. The engagement surface can engage the angled stop when the kickstand is in the open position. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a pool cleaner caddy for supporting a pool cleaner and a power supply is provided that includes a base, first and second wheel assemblies connected to the base, a stem, and a handle assembly. The base has a front cleaner support, a center cleaner support, a stem locking bracket, and a channel that includes first and second angled locking tabs. The front cleaner support and the center cleaner support engage and support a pool cleaner with wheels of the pool cleaner not in engagement with the base. The stem is removably mounted to the base with a first portion secured within the channel by the first and second locking tabs, and a second portion secured to the stem locking bracket by a first releasable mounting means. The handle assembly includes a mount, and is removably secured to the stem such that the mount is engaged with the stem by a second releasable mounting means. The first and second releasable mounting means can be depressible. For example, the first and second releasable mounting means can be a button-snap connector. The stem can be snapped into the channel and the stem locking bracket. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the stem can include a lower stem portion and an upper stem portion. The upper stem portion can be removably secured to the lower stem portion by a third releasable mounting means. The lower stem portion can be secured to the stem locking bracket and the handle assembly mount can be secured to the upper stem portion. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first, second, and third releasable mounting means can be depressed to disengage the lower section of the lower stem portion from the stem locking bracket, the lower section of the upper stem portion from the upper section of the lower stem portion, and the mount from the upper section of the upper stem portion. 
     The pool cleaner caddy can also include a fastener, e.g., a ribbed fastener, while the stem portion can include a through-hole and the base can include a transverse opening. The fastener can extend through the through-hole and the transverse opening to secure the stem to the base. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first and second wheel assemblies can be removable from the base. The base can include a first outer wall, a first inner wall, a first wheel chamber between the first outer wall and the first inner wall, a second outer wall, a second inner wall, and a second wheel chamber between the second outer wall and the second inner wall. The first wheel assembly can be secured to the first inner wall and the first outer wall, and the second wheel assembly can be secured to the second inner wall and the second outer wall. Additionally, the first wheel assembly can include a first wheel, a first axle, a first axle receiver, and a first screw, and the second wheel assembly can include a second wheel, a second axle, a second axle receiver, and a second screw. The first wheel can be positioned within the first wheel chamber, the first axle can be secured to the first outer wall and engage the first wheel, the first axle receiver can be secured to the first inner wall, and the first screw can secure the first axle receiver to the first axle. The second wheel can be positioned within the second wheel chamber, the second axle can be secured to the second outer wall and engage the second wheel, the second axle receiver can be secured to the second inner wall, and the second screw can secure the second axle receiver to the second axle. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first outer wall includes a first outer mounting boss that has at least one angled channel while the first axle includes at least one angled thread. The first axle can extend through the first outer mounting boss with the at least one angled thread engaged the at least one angled channel. Similarly, the second outer wall can include a second outer mounting boss that has at least one angled channel while the second axle can include at least one angled thread. The second axle can extend through the second outer mounting boss with the at least one angled thread engaged with the at least one angled channel. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first inner wall can include a first keyed opening that has at least one inward extension, the first axle receiver can include at least one radial extension, the second inner wall can include a second keyed opening having at least one inward extension, and the second axle receiver can include at least one radial extension. The first axle receiver can be positioned within the first keyed opening with at least one radial extension overlapping the at least one inward extension to secure the first axle receiver to the first inner wall. The second axle receiver can be positioned within the second keyed opening with at least one radial extension overlapping the at least one inward extension to secure the second axle receiver to the second inner wall. 
     The base can also include a catch that can engage a pool cleaner wheel and prevent the pool cleaner from falling off of the caddy. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the handle assembly defines a power supply housing that can house a power supply. The handle assembly can include a front shell and a rear shell that can be mated to form the handle assembly. The front shell can include a front tray and the rear shell can include a recess that receives the front tray. The handle assembly can also include a rear support wall that, along with the front tray, secures a power supply to the handle assembly. The rear support wall can include at least one flexible locking tab that can engage the power supply and retain the power supply with the handle assembly. The handle assembly can also include a cable housing that can receive and support a power supply cable. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, handle assembly mount includes an internal key and the stem includes a key-slot. The internal key can engage the key-slot to position the handle assembly on the stem. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the pool cleaner caddy can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a kit for a pool cleaner caddy used to support a pool cleaner is provided that includes a base, first and second wheel assemblies that are removably securable to the base, a stem, and a handle assembly. The base has a front cleaner support, a center cleaner support, a stem locking bracket, and a channel that includes first and second angled locking tabs. The front cleaner support and the center cleaner support can engage and support a pool cleaner with wheels of the pool cleaner not in engagement with the base. The stem can be removably mountable to the base with a first portion being removably securable within the channel by the first and second locking tabs, and a second portion being removably securable to the stem locking bracket by a first releasable mounting means. The handle assembly includes a mount, and can be removably securable to the stem such that the mount is engaged with the stem by a second releasable mounting means. The first and second releasable mounting means can be depressible. For example, the first and second releasable mounting means can be button-snap connector. In some aspects, the stem can be snapped into the channel and the stem locking bracket. 
     The kit for a pool cleaner caddy can also include a fastener, e.g., a ribbed fastener, while the stem can include a through-hole and the base can include a transverse opening. The fastener can be positioned in the through-hole and the transverse opening to secure the stem to the base. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the stem can include a lower stem portion and an upper stem portion. The upper stem portion can be removably securable to the lower stem portion by a third releasable mounting means. The lower stem portion can be securable to the stem locking bracket and the handle assembly mount can be securable to the upper stem portion. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the base can include a first outer wall, a first inner wall, a first wheel chamber between the first outer wall and the first inner wall, a second outer wall, a second inner wall, and a second wheel chamber between the second outer wall and the second inner wall. The first wheel assembly can be securable to the first inner wall and the first outer wall, and the second wheel assembly can be securable to the second inner wall and the second outer wall. Additionally, the first wheel assembly can include a first wheel, a first axle, a first axle receiver, and a first screw, and the second wheel assembly can include a second wheel, a second axle, a second axle receiver, and a second screw. The first wheel can be positionable within the first wheel chamber, the first axle can be securable to the first outer wall and engage the wheel, the first axle receiver can be securable to the first inner wall, and the first screw can be utilized to secure the first axle receiver to the first axle. The second wheel can be positionable within the second wheel chamber, the second axle can be securable to the second outer wall and engage the second wheel, the second axle receiver can be securable to the second inner wall, and the second screw can be utilized to secure the second axle receiver to the second axle. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first outer wall includes a first outer mounting boss that has at least one angled channel while the first axle includes at least one angled thread. The at least one angled thread of the first axle can be engageable with the at least one angled channel of the first outer mounting boss. Similarly, the second outer wall can include a second outer mounting boss that has at least one angled channel while the second axle can include at least one angled thread. The at least one angled thread of the second axle can be engageable with the at least one angled channel of the second outer mounting boss. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first inner wall can include a first keyed opening that has at least one inward extension, the first axle receiver can include at least one radial extension, the second inner wall can include a second keyed opening having at least one inward extension, and the second axle receiver can include at least one radial extension. The first axle receiver can be positionable within the first keyed opening with at least one radial extension overlapping the at least one inward extension to secure the first axle receiver to the first inner wall. The second axle receiver can be positionable within the second keyed opening with at least one radial extension overlapping the at least one inward extension to secure the second axle receiver to the second inner wall. 
     The base can also include a catch that can engage a pool cleaner wheel and prevent the pool cleaner from falling off of the caddy. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the handle assembly defines a power supply housing that can house a power supply. The handle assembly can include a front shell and a rear shell that can be mated to form the handle assembly. The front shell can include a front tray and the rear shell can include a recess that can receive the front tray. The handle assembly can also include a rear support wall that, along with the front tray, can secure a power supply to the handle assembly. The rear support wall can include at least one flexible locking tab that can engage the power supply and retain the power supply with the handle assembly. The handle assembly can also include a cable housing that can receive and support a power supply cable. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, handle assembly mount includes an internal key and the stem includes a key-slot. The internal key can engage the key-slot to position the handle assembly on the stem. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the kit for a pool cleaner can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a pool cleaner caddy is provided that includes a base, a first wheel assembly, and a second wheel assembly. The base has a first outer mounting boss and a second outer mounting boss. Each of the first and second outer mounting bosses have at least one angled channel. The first wheel assembly includes a first wheel, a first axle that has at least one left-handed angled thread, a first axle receiver, and a first screw. The second wheel assembly includes a second wheel, a second axle that has at least one left-handed angled thread, a second axle receiver, and a second screw. The first axle extends through the first outer mounting boss and the first wheel with the at least one left-handed angled thread engaged with the at least one angled channel of the first outer mounting boss. The first axle receiver is secured to the base and at least partially receives the first axle. The first screw secures the first axle receiver to the first axle. The second axle extends through the second outer mounting boss and the second wheel with the at least one left-handed angled thread engaged with the at least one angled channel of the second outer mounting boss. The second axle receiver is secured to the base and at least partially receives the second axle. The second screw secures the second axle receiver to the second axle. 
     The first screw can extend through the first axle receiver and threadedly engage a distal end of the first axle to cause the at least one left-handed angled thread of the first axle to further engage the at least one angled channel of the first outer mounting boss. Similarly, the second screw can extend through the second axle receiver and threadedly engage a distal end of the second axle to cause the at least one left-handed angled thread of the second axle to further engage the at least one angled channel of the second outer mounting boss. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the base includes a first keyed opening that has at least one inward extension and a second keyed opening that has at least one inward extension. The first axle receiver can include at least one radial extension and the second axle receiver can also include at least one radial extension. The first axle receiver can be positioned within the first keyed opening with at least one radial extension overlapping the at least one inward extension to further secure the first axle receiver to the base, and the second axle receiver can be positioned within the second keyed opening with at least one radial extension overlapping the at least one inward extension to further secure the second axle receiver to the base. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the first axle can include a distal end having a notch, the second axle can include a distal end having a notch, the first axle receiver can include a locking assembly, and the second axle receiver can include a locking assembly. The notch of the first axle receiver can lock with the locking assembly of the first axle receiver to secure the first axle to the first axle receiver, and the notch of the second axle receiver can lock with the locking assembly of the second axle receiver to secure the second axle to the second axle receiver. The locking assemblies can include a ramped protrusion, a block protrusion, and an indentation between the ramped protrusion and the block protrusion. The first and second axle receivers can each include an inner chamber and the locking assemblies can be positioned within the inner chambers. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the base can additionally includes a first outer wall having the first outer mounting boss, a first inner wall, a first wheel chamber between the first outer wall and the first inner wall, a second outer wall having the second outer mounting boss, a second inner wall, and a second wheel chamber between the second outer wall and the second inner wall. The first wheel can be positioned within the first wheel chamber, the first axle receiver can be secured to the first inner wall, the second wheel can be positioned within the second wheel chamber, and the second axle receiver can be secured to the second inner wall. 
     In some embodiment of the disclosure, the pool cleaner caddy can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     In accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure, a caddy is provided that includes a base and at least one wheel assembly. The base has an outer mounting boss that has at least one angled channel. The wheel assembly includes a wheel, an axle that has at least one left-handed angled thread, an axle receiver, and a screw. The axle extends through the outer mounting boss and the wheel with the at least one left-handed angled thread engaged with the at least one angled channel of the outer mounting boss. The axle receiver is secured to the base and at least partially receives the axle. The screw secures the axle receiver to the axle. 
     The screw can extend through the axle receiver and threadedly engage a distal end of the axle to cause the at least one left-handed angled thread of the axle to further engage the at least one angled channel of the outer mounting boss. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the base includes a keyed opening that has at least one inward extension, and the axle receiver can include at least one radial extension. The axle receiver can be positioned within the keyed opening with at least one radial extension overlapping the at least one inward extension to further secure the axle receiver to the base. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the axle can include a distal end having a notch and the first axle receiver can include a locking assembly. The notch of the axle receiver can lock with the locking assembly of the axle receiver to secure the axle to the first axle receiver. The locking assembly can include a ramped protrusion, a block protrusion, and an indentation between the ramped protrusion and the block protrusion. The axle receivers can include an inner chamber and the locking assembly can be positioned within the inner chamber. 
     In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the base can additionally include an outer wall having the outer mounting boss, an inner wall, and a wheel chamber between the outer wall and the inner wall. The wheel can be positioned within the wheel chamber and the axle receiver can be secured to the inner wall. In some embodiment of the disclosure, the pool cleaner caddy can be in combination with the pool cleaner. 
     Additional features, functions and benefits of the disclosed swimming pool cleaner and methods in connection therewith will be apparent from the detailed description which follows, particularly when read in conjunction with the accompanying figures. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       For a more complete understanding of the present disclosure, reference is made to the following detailed description of an exemplary embodiment considered in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which: 
         FIG. 1  is a rear perspective view of a first embodiment of a pool cleaner; 
         FIG. 2  is a rear perspective exploded view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 1  with a first embodiment of a canister subassembly of a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly separated from a motor housing thereof; 
         FIG. 3  is a rear elevational view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 1 ; 
         FIG. 4  is a front elevational view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 1 ; 
         FIG. 5  is a right side elevational view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 1 ; 
         FIG. 6  is a left side elevational view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 1 ; 
         FIG. 7  is a top plan view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 1 ; 
         FIG. 8  is a bottom view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 1 ; 
         FIG. 9  is an exploded perspective view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 2 ; 
         FIG. 10A  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  10 A- 10 A of  FIG. 7  showing, among other things, the chambers of the pool cleaner; 
         FIG. 10B  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  10 B- 10 B of  FIG. 7  showing, among other things, the flow paths of the pool cleaner; 
         FIG. 10C  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  10 C- 10 C of  FIG. 7  showing, among other things, the chambers and flow paths of the pool cleaner; 
         FIG. 11  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  11 - 11  of  FIG. 7 ; 
         FIG. 12  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  12 - 12  of  FIG. 3 ; 
         FIG. 13A  is an enlarged view of Area  13 A,  13 B of  FIG. 6  showing a first embodiment of a retention latch; 
         FIG. 13B  is an enlarged view of the retention latch of  FIG. 13A  deformed by a force; 
         FIG. 14  is a partially exploded view of the cleaner of  FIG. 1  showing removal of the canister subassembly from the motor housing; 
         FIG. 15A  is an enlarged view of Area  15 A,  15 B of  FIG. 11  showing a first embodiment of a quick-release latch; 
         FIG. 15B  is an enlarged view of the quick-release latch of  FIG. 15A  deformed by a force; 
         FIG. 16  is front elevational view of a portion of the canister subassembly opened and debris being removed; 
         FIG. 17  is a perspective view of a second embodiment of a pool cleaner with gears thereof shown schematically distal of the motor housing; 
         FIG. 18  is a right side elevational view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 17 ; 
         FIG. 19  is a bottom view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 17 ; 
         FIG. 20  is a perspective view of a second embodiment of a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly; 
         FIG. 21  is a top view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 22  is a side view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 23  is an exploded perspective view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 24  is a partially exploded perspective view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 25  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly taken along line A-A of  FIG. 21 ; 
         FIG. 26  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly taken along line  26 - 26  of  FIG. 25 ; 
         FIG. 27  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly taken along line A-A of  FIG. 21  with a canister bottom in a closed configuration; 
         FIG. 28  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly taken along line A-A of  FIG. 21  with the canister bottom in an open configuration; 
         FIG. 29  is a perspective view of a canister body of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 30  is a perspective view of a large debris container of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 31  is a top view of a gasket of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 32  is a sectional view of the gasket taken along line  32 - 32  of  FIG. 31 ; 
         FIG. 33  is a side view of a fine debris container of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 34  is a sectional view of the fine debris container of  FIG. 33 ; 
         FIG. 35  is a top view of a fine debris container top of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 36  is a sectional view of the fine debris container top taken along line  36 - 36  of  FIG. 35 ; 
         FIG. 37  is a top view of a second gasket of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 38  is a perspective view of a cyclone block of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 39  is a top view of a cyclone block of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 40  is a sectional view of the cyclone block taken along line  40 - 40  of  FIG. 39 ; 
         FIG. 41  is a perspective view of a ring of vortex finders of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 42  is a top view of a ring of vortex finders of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 43  is a sectional view of the ring of vortex finders taken along line  43 - 43  of  FIG. 42 ; 
         FIG. 44  is a top view of a vortex finder gasket of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 20 ; 
         FIG. 45  is a perspective view of a second embodiment of a pool cleaner including a motor assembly and a drive assembly, an outer housing or skin of the pool cleaner having been removed for clarity; 
         FIG. 46  is a perspective exploded view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 45 ; 
         FIG. 47  is a top view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 45 ; 
         FIG. 48  is a side view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 45 ; 
         FIG. 49  is a bottom view of the pool cleaner of  FIG. 45 ; 
         FIG. 50  is a bottom view of a third embodiment of a pool cleaner including a motor assembly and a drive assembly, an outer housing or skin of the pool cleaner having been removed for clarity; 
         FIG. 51  is a perspective view of a fourth embodiment of a pool cleaner of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 52  is a front view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner of  FIG. 51 ; 
         FIG. 53  is a rear view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner of  FIG. 51 ; 
         FIG. 54  is a left side view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner of  FIG. 51 ; 
         FIG. 55  is a right side view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner of  FIG. 51 ; 
         FIG. 56  is a top view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner of  FIG. 51 ; 
         FIG. 57  is a bottom view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner of  FIG. 51 ; 
         FIG. 58  is a partially exploded view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner of  FIG. 51  showing a third embodiment hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly exploded from a pool cleaner body; 
         FIG. 59A  is a perspective view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58  with a handle in a down position; 
         FIG. 59B  is a perspective view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58  with the handle in an up position; 
         FIG. 60A  is a top view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58  with the handle in a down position; 
         FIG. 60B  is a top view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58  with the handle in an up position; 
         FIG. 61  is a side view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 62  is a partially exploded view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 63  is an exploded view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 64  is a perspective view of a canister body of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 65  is a side view of a canister body of  FIG. 64 ; 
         FIG. 66  is a perspective view of a large debris container of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 67  is a top view of a fine debris subassembly of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 68  is a sectional view of the fine debris subassembly of  FIG. 67  taken along line  68 - 68  of  FIG. 67 ; 
         FIG. 69  is a perspective view of a cyclone block of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 70  is a top view of the cyclone block of  FIG. 69 ; 
         FIG. 71  is a sectional view of the cyclone block of  FIG. 69  taken along line  71 - 71  of  FIG. 70 ; 
         FIG. 72  is a perspective view of an impeller subassembly of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly of  FIG. 58 ; 
         FIG. 73  is a top view of the impeller subassembly of  FIG. 72 ; 
         FIG. 74  is a sectional view of the impeller subassembly of  FIGS. 72 and 73  taken along line  74 - 74  of  FIG. 73 ; 
         FIG. 75A  is a perspective view of the handle of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly; 
         FIG. 75B  is a front view of the handle of  FIG. 75 ; 
         FIG. 76  is an enlarged partial perspective view showing aspects of the handle of  FIGS. 75A and 75B ; 
         FIG. 77  is an enlarged view of Area  77  of  FIG. 69  showing a handle engagement tab in greater detail; 
         FIG. 78A  is a sectional view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly taken along line  78 A- 78 A of  FIG. 60 ; 
         FIG. 78B  is a sectional view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly taken along line  78 B- 78 B of  FIG. 61 ; 
         FIG. 78C  is a sectional view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly taken along line  78 C- 78 C of  FIG. 60  with the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly in a closed position; 
         FIG. 78D  is a sectional view of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly taken along line  78 C- 78 C of  FIG. 60  with the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly in an open position; 
         FIG. 78E  is an enlarged view of Area  78 E of  FIG. 78A ; 
         FIG. 78F  is an enlarged view of Area  78 F of  FIG. 78A ; 
         FIG. 79  is a partial sectional view showing engagement of the handle with a pool cleaner body taken along line  79 - 79  of  FIG. 56 ; 
         FIG. 80  is a partial sectional view showing engagement of the handle with the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly taken along line  80 - 80  of  FIG. 56 ; 
         FIG. 81  is a partial sectional view showing engagement of the handle with the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly with the handle in an up position taken along line  81 - 81  of  FIG. 60B ; 
         FIG. 82  is a perspective view of a check valve of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly with the check valve in an open position; 
         FIG. 83  is an exploded view of the check valve of  FIG. 82 ; 
         FIG. 84  is a front view of the check valve of  FIG. 82  with the check valve in an open position; 
         FIG. 85  is a side view of the check valve of  FIG. 82  with the check valve in a closed position; 
         FIG. 86  is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment filter medium of the third embodiment hydrocylonic particle separator assembly; 
         FIG. 87  is a top view of the alternative embodiment filter medium of  FIG. 86 ; 
         FIG. 88  is a sectional view of the alternative embodiment filter medium of  FIG. 86  taken along line  88 - 88  of  FIG. 87 ; 
         FIG. 89  is an exploded view of a pool cleaner body of a fourth embodiment pool cleaner of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 90  is a first perspective view of a roller drive gear box of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner; 
         FIG. 91  is a second perspective view of the roller drive gear box of  FIG. 90 ; 
         FIG. 92  is an exploded view of the roller drive gear box of  FIG. 90 ; 
         FIG. 93  is a top view of the roller drive gear box of  FIG. 90  with a lid removed for clarity; 
         FIG. 94  is a perspective view of a chassis, a first roller, and a second roller of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner, with the first and second rollers attached to the chassis; 
         FIG. 95  is an exploded view of the chassis, first roller, and second roller of  FIG. 94 , and further showing a roller latch utilized to secure the first and second rollers to the chassis; 
         FIG. 96  is a bottom view of the chassis, first roller, and second roller of  FIG. 94 ; 
         FIG. 97  is a bottom view of the chassis of  FIG. 94 ; 
         FIG. 98  is a perspective view of the roller latch of  FIG. 95 ; 
         FIG. 99  is a front view of the roller latch of  FIG. 98 ; 
         FIG. 100  is a top view of the roller latch of  FIG. 98 ; 
         FIG. 101A  is a sectional view of the chassis, first roller, and second roller of  FIG. 96  taken along line  101 - 101  of  FIG. 96 ; 
         FIG. 101B  is a an enlarged view of Area  101 B of  FIG. 101A ; 
         FIG. 102  is a sectional view of the chassis, first roller, and second roller of  FIG. 96  taken along line  101 - 101  of  FIG. 96  and shown at a perspective view; 
         FIG. 103  is a perspective view showing the second roller being installed on the chassis with the roller latch in an unlocked position; 
         FIG. 104  is a perspective view showing the second roller installed on the chassis with the roller latch in a locked position; 
         FIG. 105  is a perspective view of an exemplary roller assembly including a first cage half, a second cage half, a roller cover, and a roller mount in accordance with embodiments of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 106  is an exploded view of the exemplary roller assembly of  FIG. 105 ; 
         FIG. 107  is a perspective view of a first cage half of the exemplary roller assembly of  FIG. 105 ; 
         FIG. 108  is a bottom view of the first cage half of  FIG. 107 ; 
         FIG. 109  is a right side view of the first cage half of  FIG. 107 ; 
         FIG. 110  is a left side view of the first cage half of  FIG. 107 ; 
         FIG. 111  is a top view of the first cage half of  FIG. 107 ; 
         FIG. 112  is a perspective view of a second cage half of the exemplary roller assembly of  FIG. 105 ; 
         FIG. 113  is a bottom view of the second cage half of  FIG. 112 ; 
         FIG. 114  is a top view of the second cage half of  FIG. 112 ; 
         FIG. 115  is a left side view of the second cage half of  FIG. 112 ; 
         FIG. 116  is a right side view of the second cage half of  FIG. 112 ; 
         FIG. 117  is a perspective view of a cage assembly of the exemplary roller assembly of  FIG. 105 , including the first and second cage halves interlocked; 
         FIG. 118  is an enlarged view of the cage assembly of  FIG. 117 , including a first connecting edge between the first and second cage halves; 
         FIG. 119  is an enlarged view of the cage assembly of  FIG. 117 , including a second connecting edge between the first and second cage halves; 
         FIG. 120  is a top perspective view of a roller cover of the exemplary roller assembly of  FIG. 105 ; 
         FIG. 121  is a bottom view of the roller cover of  FIG. 120 ; 
         FIG. 122  is a top view of the first and second cage halves partially interlocked with the roller cover of  FIG. 120 ; 
         FIG. 123  is a perspective view of a roller mount of the exemplary roller assembly of  FIG. 105 ; 
         FIG. 124  is a side view of the roller mount of  FIG. 123 ; 
         FIG. 125  is a top view of the exemplary roller assembly of  FIG. 105  with the roller mount of  FIG. 123  engaged therewith; 
         FIG. 126  is a sectional view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner taken along line  126 - 126  of  FIG. 56 ; 
         FIG. 127  is an enlarged view of Area  127  of  FIG. 126 ; 
         FIG. 128  is an enlarged view of Area  127  of  FIG. 126  with a first alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly to the pool cleaner body shown; 
         FIG. 129  is an enlarged view of Area  127  of  FIG. 126  with a second alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly to the pool cleaner body shown; 
         FIG. 130  is an enlarged view of Area  127  of  FIG. 126  with a third alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly to the pool cleaner body shown; 
         FIG. 131  is an enlarged view of Area  127  of  FIG. 126  with a fourth alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly to the pool cleaner body shown; 
         FIG. 132  is a partially exploded view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner showing a removable and replaceable skin exploded from the pool cleaner body; 
         FIG. 133  is a perspective view of the fourth embodiment pool cleaner showing an alternative removable and replaceable skin attached to the pool cleaner body; 
         FIG. 134  is a front perspective view of a pool cleaner power supply of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 135  is a rear perspective view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 136  is a front view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 137  is a rear view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 138  is a left side view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 139  is a right side view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 140  is a top view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 141  is a bottom view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 142  is a right side view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134  with a kickstand in an open position; 
         FIG. 143  is a top view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134  with a kickstand in an open position; 
         FIG. 144  is an exploded view of the pool cleaner power supply of  FIG. 134 ; 
         FIG. 145  is a front perspective of a potted power converter board assembly of the pool cleaner power supply; 
         FIG. 146  is a front view of the potted power converter board assembly of  FIG. 145 ; 
         FIG. 147A  is a rear perspective view of the potted power converter board assembly of  FIG. 145  shown with potting compound; 
         FIG. 147B  is a rear perspective view of the potted power converter board assembly of  FIG. 145  shown without potting compound; 
         FIG. 148A  is a front exploded view of the potted power converter board assembly of  FIG. 145 ; 
         FIG. 148B  is a rear exploded view of the potted power converter board assembly of  FIG. 145 ; 
         FIG. 149  is an exploded view of an alternative cord cover including seal; 
         FIG. 150  is a rear view showing a contoured tray and power printed circuit board of the potted power converter board assembly side-by-side; 
         FIG. 151  is a side view showing the contoured tray and power printed circuit board of the potted power converter board assembly side-by-side; 
         FIG. 152  is a sectional view of the potted power converter board assembly of  FIG. 145  taken along line  152 - 152  of  FIG. 146 ; 
         FIG. 153  is a front perspective view of a rear housing of the pool cleaner power supply; 
         FIG. 154  is a front view of the rear housing of  FIG. 153 ; 
         FIG. 155  is a rear view of the rear housing of  FIG. 153 ; 
         FIG. 156  is an enlarged view of Area  156  of  FIG. 153 ; 
         FIG. 157  is a sectional view of the rear housing of  FIG. 153  taken along line  157 - 157  of  FIG. 154 ; 
         FIG. 158  is an enlarged view of Area  158  of  FIG. 157 ; 
         FIG. 159  is an enlarged rear perspective view of Area  158  of  FIG. 157 ; 
         FIG. 160  is an enlarged front perspective view of Area  158  of  FIG. 157 ; 
         FIG. 161  is a front perspective view of a kickstand of the pool cleaner power supply; 
         FIG. 162  is a front view of the kickstand of  FIG. 161 ; 
         FIG. 163  is a detailed, front bottom perspective view of a locking protrusion of the kickstand; 
         FIG. 164  is a detailed, front top perspective view of the locking protrusion of the kickstand; 
         FIG. 165  is a perspective view of the locking protrusion of the kickstand engaged with a kickstand engagement of the rear housing, and in a closed position; 
         FIG. 166  is a perspective view of the locking protrusion of the kickstand engaged with the kickstand engagement of the rear housing, and in an open position; 
         FIG. 167  is a sectional view taken along line  167 - 167  of  FIG. 140  showing the kickstand attached to the rear housing and in a closed position; 
         FIG. 168  is a sectional view taken along line  168 - 168  of  FIG. 143  showing the kickstand attached to the rear housing and in an open position; 
         FIG. 169  is an enlarged view of Area  169  of  FIG. 168 ; 
         FIG. 170  is a partially exploded view of the pool cleaner power supply showing a fan and fan cover exploded; 
         FIG. 171  is a perspective view of a pool cleaner caddy of the present disclosure; 
         FIG. 172  is a left side view of the pool cleaner caddy of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 173  is a rear view of the pool cleaner caddy of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 174  is a front view of the pool cleaner caddy of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 175  is a top view of the pool cleaner caddy of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 176  is a bottom view of the pool cleaner caddy of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 177  is an exploded view of the pool cleaner caddy of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 178  is a front exploded view of the pool cleaner caddy of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 179  is a perspective view of a base of the pool cleaner caddy; 
         FIG. 180  is a front view of the base of  FIG. 178 ; 
         FIG. 181  is a top view of the base of  FIG. 178 ; 
         FIG. 182  is a bottom view of the base of  FIG. 178 ; 
         FIG. 183  is an enlarged view of Area  183  of  FIG. 179 ; 
         FIG. 184  is an enlarged view of Area  184  of  FIG. 181 ; 
         FIG. 185  is a partial perspective view of the inner wall of a left side wheel housing of the base; 
         FIG. 186  is a perspective view of an axle of the pool cleaner caddy; 
         FIG. 187  is a top view of the axle of  FIG. 186 ; 
         FIG. 188  is a bottom view of the axle of  FIG. 186 ; 
         FIG. 189  is a perspective view of an axle receiver of the pool cleaner caddy; 
         FIG. 190  is a front view of the axle receiver of  FIG. 189 ; 
         FIG. 191  is a rear view of the axle receiver of  FIG. 189 ; 
         FIG. 192  is a side view of the axle receiver of  FIG. 189 ; 
         FIG. 193  is a perspective view of a wheel of the pool cleaner caddy; 
         FIG. 194  is a sectional view of the wheel of  FIG. 193  taken along line  194 - 194  of  FIG. 193 ; 
         FIG. 195  is an enlarged view of Area  195  of  FIG. 174 ; 
         FIG. 196  is a partial sectional view taken along line  196 - 196  of  FIG. 175 ; 
         FIG. 197  is an enlarged view of Area  197  of  FIG. 171 ; 
         FIG. 198  is an enlarged view of Area  198  of  FIG. 175 ; 
         FIG. 199  is a partial side view taken in the direction of arrows  199 - 199  of  FIG. 173  showing engagement of the axle receiver with the inner wall of the left side wheel; 
         FIG. 200  is a front left perspective view of a stem of the pool cleaner caddy; 
         FIG. 201  is a front right perspective view of the stem; 
         FIG. 202  is a perspective view of a handle assembly of the pool cleaner caddy; 
         FIG. 203  is an exploded view of the handle assembly of  FIG. 202 ; 
         FIG. 204  is a front view of the handle assembly of  FIG. 202 ; 
         FIG. 205  is a rear view of the handle assembly of  FIG. 202 ; 
         FIG. 206  is a right side view of the handle assembly of  FIG. 202 ; 
         FIG. 207  is a top view of the handle assembly of  FIG. 202 ; 
         FIG. 208  is a front perspective view of the pool cleaner caddy during construction with the lower stem portion, a first wheel assembly, and a second wheel assembly connected to the base; 
         FIG. 209  is a rear perspective view of the pool cleaner caddy during construction with the lower stem portion, the first wheel assembly, and the second wheel assembly connected to the base; 
         FIG. 210  is a top view of the pool cleaner caddy during construction with the lower stem portion, a first wheel assembly, and a second wheel assembly connected to the base; 
         FIG. 211  is a rear bottom detailed perspective view showing the engagement of a ribbed fastener with the lower stem portion and the base; 
         FIG. 212  is a front perspective view of the pool cleaner caddy during construction with the lower stem portion, a first wheel assembly, and a second wheel assembly connected to the base, and the upper stem portion connected to the lower stem portion; and 
         FIG. 213  is a front perspective view of the pool cleaner caddy during construction with the lower stem portion, a first wheel assembly, and a second wheel assembly connected to the base, the upper stem portion connected to the lower stem portion, and the handle assembly connected to the upper stem portion. 
     
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PRESENT DISCLOSURE 
     According to the present disclosure, advantageous apparatus are provided for facilitating maintenance of pool or spa, as well as for facilitating maintenance of a pool or spa cleaning device. More particularly, the present disclosure includes, but is not limited to, discussion of a pool cleaner including a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly, a quick-release latch for the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly, and a pool cleaner having six rollers. 
     With initial reference to  FIGS. 1-8 , a pool cleaner  100  generally includes a drive assembly  110  and a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120  including a canister subassembly  121  and a fluid turbine subassembly  122  (see  FIG. 2 ). In an exemplary embodiment, pool cleaner  100  is an electric pool cleaner that includes six rollers and hydrocyclonic particle separation capability. The motors can be powered by an electric cable (not shown) extending to a power source at the surface (for example), a battery, and/or inductive coupling, for example. The drive assembly  110  includes a motor housing  124 , an intake  126 , and six brushed rollers  128   a - 128   f . Two roller drives  130  (see  FIGS. 1, 2, 5, and 6 ) extend from opposite sides of the motor housing  124 . Each of the two roller drives  130  are respectively in operative communication with a first and second motor (not shown) positioned within the motor housing  124 . A first roller set (rollers  128   a ,  128   c , and  128   e ) is in mechanical communication with a first one of the roller drives  130  (e.g., on the left side of the cleaner), which is in communication with the first drive motor so each one of the rollers of the first roller set (e.g., roller  128   a ,  128   c , and  128   e ) turn at the same first rate. A second roller set (rollers  128   b ,  128   d , and  128   f ) is in mechanical communication with a second one of the roller drives  130  (e.g., on the right side of the cleaner), which is in communication with the second drive motor, so each one of rollers of the second roller set (e.g., roller  128   b ,  128   b , and  128   f ) turn at the same second rate. 
     A front support mount  132  extends from a front portion of the motor housing  124 , and includes front roller mounts  134 . Two of the brushed rollers  128   e ,  128   f  are connected with the front roller mounts  134 , and are rotatable therewith. The intake  126  includes a body  136  having a rear support mount  138  extending therefrom. The intake  126  is interconnected with the motor housing  124  by an engagement means  139  (see  FIG. 5 ). The engagement means  139  can be a mating connection, e.g., dovetail connection, between the intake  126  and the motor housing  124 , a snap fit connection, or any other connection means known to one of ordinary skill in the art. The rear support mount  138  extends from the body  136  and includes rear roller mounts  140 . Two of the brushed rollers  128   a ,  128   b  are connected with the rear roller mounts  140 , and are rotatable therewith. 
     Although electric sources are contemplated, other power sources are also contemplated. For example, the power source can be positive water pressure, as in what is commonly referred to in the pool industry as a “pressure cleaner.” As another example, the power source can be negative water pressure, as in what is commonly referred to in the pool industry as a “suction cleaner.” Any power source and/or combinations thereof are contemplated. 
     The intake  126  further includes an inlet opening  142  (see  FIG. 8 ) and an outlet opening  144  (see  FIG. 2 ) defined by the body  136 . A channel  146  extends between the inlet opening  142  and the outlet opening  144 . A rim  148  extends about the perimeter of the outlet opening  144 , and defines a channel  150  that cooperates with a portion of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120 , discussed in greater detail below. 
     The motor housing  124  further includes a mounting boss  152  and a front latch  154 , both extending from a top of the motor housing  124 . As shown in  FIG. 2 , which is a partially exploded view of the cleaner  100 , the fluid turbine subassembly  122  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120  is mounted to the mounting boss  152  while the canister subassembly  121  is removable therefrom. The mounting boss  152  houses a third motor (not shown) that drives the fluid turbine subassembly  122 . The front latch  154  is configured to releasably engage the canister subassembly  121  to secure the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120  to the motor housing  124 , this engagement is discussed in greater detail below in connection with  FIGS. 13A and 13B . 
       FIG. 9  is an exploded perspective view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120  of  FIG. 2 , including the canister subassembly  121  and the fluid turbine subassembly  122 . The fluid turbine subassembly  122  includes an impeller  156 , a grommet  158 , a finger guard  160 , and a diffuser  162 . The impeller  156  includes a shaft  164  that extends through the grommet  158  and engages the third motor (not shown), which can be positioned within the mounting boss  152  of the motor housing  124 . The finger guard  160  is mounted over the impeller  156 , and diverts flow through the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120 , which is discussed in greater detail below in connection with  FIGS. 10A, 10B, 11, and 12 . The diffuser  162  is positioned over the finger guard  160  and utilized to normalize the flow generated by the impeller  156 , which is driven by the third motor (not shown). The canister subassembly  121  includes a canister body  166  having a top  168  and a bottom  170 , a fine debris container  172 , a filtering medium  174  (e.g., a coarsely perforated mesh) mounted to a cyclone manifold  176 , a ring of cyclone containers  178 , and a top cap  180 . 
     As referenced previously, the canister body  166  includes upper and lower portions  168 ,  170 , which are engaged to one another by a hinge  182  and releasably secured to one another by a release means  184  (e.g., a quick-release latch  184 ) (see, e.g.,  FIG. 5 ). The canister body  166  generally defines an inner chamber  186 , and includes a canister intake  188  generally positioned on the upper portion  168  of the canister body  166 . The canister intake  188  includes an inlet  190 , a tangential outlet  192 , and a canister intake  194  extending between the inlet  190  and the tangential outlet  192 . The tangential outlet  192  is positioned in a wall of the upper portion  168  of the canister body  166  and at a tangent to the canister body  166 , such that fluid flowing through the canister intake channel  194  enters the inner chamber  186  of the canister body  166  at a tangent thereto. This configuration results in the generation of a cyclonic flow within the inner chamber  186  of the canister body  166 , as fluid tangentially enters the inner chamber  186 . The lower portion  170  of the canister body  166  includes a central aperture  196  encircled by a mounting ridge  198 , the central aperture  196  receives the fluid turbine subassembly  122  and the mounting boss  152  of the motor housing  124 . Accordingly, the fluid turbine subassembly  122  and the mounting boss  152  generally extend through the central aperture  196  and into the inner chamber  186  of the canister body  166 . 
     The fine debris container  172  includes a central hub  200  surrounded by a dish  202  extending radially from the central hub  200 . The dish  202  generally has an upwardly-curving shape such that it catches any debris that falls into the dish  202  and can form a static area where falling debris can land. The central hub  200  includes a top opening  204 , a top mounting shoulder  205 , and a bottom mount  206 . A chamber  208  extends between the top opening  204  and the bottom mount  206 . The chamber  208  is configured to receive the fluid turbine assembly  124  and the mounting boss  152 , which extend through the bottom mount  206  and into the chamber  208 . The fine debris container  172  is positioned within the inner chamber  186  of the canister body  166  with the bottom mount  206  of the fine debris container  172  engaging the mounting ridge  198  of the canister body  166 . 
     The cyclone manifold  176  includes a discoid body  210  connected with an upper mounting rim  212  and a lower rim  214  by a plurality of supports  216  and a flow director  218 . The upper mounting rim  212 , lower rim  214 , and the plurality of supports  216  form a plurality of windows  220  that allow fluid to flow from the exterior of the cyclone manifold  176  to the interior thereof. The discoid body  210  includes a central opening  222 , a plurality of cyclone container mounts  224 , a mounting ring  226  about the central opening  222 , and an annular sealing ring  227  about the periphery thereof. The cyclone manifold  176  is positioned over the fine debris container  172  with the mounting rim  226  of the discoid body  210  engaging the top mounting shoulder  205  of the fine debris container&#39;s central hub  200  and the annular sealing ring  227  encircling and in engagement with an upper portion of the dish  202 . The filtering medium  174  is mounted to the cyclone manifold  176  and extends about the perimeter of the cyclone manifold  176  covering the plurality of windows  220 . Accordingly, fluid flowing from the exterior of the cyclone manifold  176  to the interior flows across the filtering medium  174  and the windows  220 . The filtering medium  174  is sized such that debris of a first size, e.g., larger debris, cannot pass through the filtering medium  174 . Instead, the larger debris contacts the filtering medium  174 , or the interior wall of the canister body  166 , and is knocked down out of the fluid flow and does not enter the interior of the cyclone manifold  176 . 
     The ring of cyclone containers  178  includes a plurality of individual cyclone containers  228 , e.g., ten cyclone containers. It should be noted that for clarity of  FIG. 9  only four of the individual cyclone containers  228  are more fully labeled with reference numbers, but one of ordinary skill in the art shall understand that each individual cyclone container  228  can include the same parts and elements. Thus, it should be understood that the description of a single cyclone container  228  holds true for all of the cyclone containers  228  that make up the ring of cyclone containers  178 . Each individual cyclone container  228  includes a circular and tapered cyclone container body  230  that defines a cyclone chamber  232  and includes an overflow opening  234 , a debris underflow nozzle  236  (see  FIG. 10B ), and a tangential inlet  238  generally positioned on a radially inward portion of each individual cyclone container  228 . Each individual cyclone container  228  also includes a mounting nozzle  240  surrounding the debris underflow nozzle  236  and configured to engage one of the plurality of cyclone container mounts  224  of the cyclone manifold  176 . The cyclone manifold  176  can include the same number of cyclone container mounts  224  as there are individual cyclone containers  228 . As such, the ring of cyclone containers  178  is positioned within the cyclone manifold  176  and within the filtering medium  174 . When the ring of cyclone containers  178  is mounted to the cyclone manifold  176 , each debris underflow nozzle  236  and mounting nozzle  240  is positioned within a respective cyclone container mount  224  wherein each extends through the respective cyclone container mount  224  and therefore through the discoid body  210  of the cyclone manifold  176 . Accordingly, debris that falls out of the debris-laden water within each individual cyclone container  228 , e.g., due to contact with the wall of the cyclone container body  230 , can fall through the debris underflow nozzle  236  and into the dish  202  of the fine debris container  172 , which is positioned below and adjacent the cyclone manifold  176 . 
     The top cap  180  includes a top plate  242  and a plurality of arched tubes  244 , e.g., ten. Each of the plurality of arched tubes  244  extends through the top plate  242  and arch from a radially outward portion of the top plate  242  to a radially central portion where they converge to form a first tubular wall  246  defining an outlet  248 . One of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate that the plurality of arched tubes  244  can be replaced with a single open area that is not segmented by arched tubes. Reference is now made to  FIG. 10A  in further describing the top cap  180 , which is a sectional view of the pool cleaner  100  taken along line  10 A- 10 A of  FIG. 7 . As can be seen from  FIG. 10A , each of the arched tubes  244  defines an inner chamber  245  and extends through the top plate  242  to form a vortex finder  250  having an opening  252  to the inner chamber  245 . Each of the plurality of arched tubes  244  arches radially inward to converge and form the first tubular wall  246 , and further converge to form a second tubular wall  254  that is spaced radially outward from, but concentric with, the first tubular wall  246 , e.g., the second tubular wall  254  has a greater radius than the first tubular wall  246 . The first and second tubular walls  246 ,  254  form a tubular chamber  256 . The vortex finder opening  252  and the inner chamber  245  of each arched tube  244  is in fluidic communication with the tubular chamber  256 , such that fluid can flow from each vortex finder opening  252 , across each inner chamber  245 , and into the tubular chamber  256  where the individual flows merge. The top cap  180  is placed over the cyclone manifold  176  and in engagement with the upper mounting rim  212  of the cyclone manifold  176  and the overflow opening  234  of each cyclone body  232 . The top cap  180  can be secured to the cyclone manifold  176  by a plurality of screws or bolts  258 . Additionally, the second tubular wall  254  includes a clasp  260  that releasably engages an upper mounting projection  262  of the fine debris container  172 . When the top cap  180  is engaged with the cyclone manifold  176 , the vortex finder  250  of each of the plurality of arched tubes  244  is inserted into the overflow opening  234  of a respective cyclone container  228  and positioned within the respective cyclone container body  230 . 
     When the top cap  180  is mounted to the cyclone manifold  176 , the tubular chamber  256  of the top cap  180  is positioned adjacent the finger guard  160  of the fluid turbine subassembly  122  so that the fluid flowing through the tubular chamber  256  is directed into the finger guard  160 . As shown at least in  FIG. 9 , the finger guard  160  includes an inner cylindrical wall  264 , an outer ring  266  surrounding the inner cylindrical wall  264  and concentric therewith, and a plurality of fins  268  extending between the outer ring  266  and the inner cylindrical wall  264 . The finger guard  160  is generally positioned over the impeller  156  and the grommet  158  with the grommet  158  being inserted into the mounting boss  152  of the motor housing  124 . The finger guard  160  is mounted to a flange  270  that extends radially from the mounting boss  152 . 
     When the top cap  180 , ring of cyclone containers  178 , cyclone manifold  176 , filtering medium  174 , fine debris container  172 , and canister body  166  are interconnected they are placed over the fluid turbine assembly  124  and the mounting boss  152  with the inner cylindrical wall  264  of the finger guard  160  abutting the first tubular wall  246  of the top cap  180 . Additionally, the inlet  190  of the canister intake  188  is positioned adjacent the outlet opening  144  of the intake  126 , with a sealing rim  272  extending radially from the inlet  190  engaged with the channel  150  that encircles the intake outlet  126 . 
     Further, the canister subassembly  121  is secured to the motor housing  124  through the engagement of the front latch  154  with the canister body  166 . Reference is made to  FIGS. 13A and 13B  in discussing this attachment, which are enlarged view of the Area  13 A of  FIG. 6  showing the front latch  154  in greater detail. Particularly, the canister body  166  includes a locking interface  276  between the upper and lower portions  168 ,  170  of the canister body  166 . The locking interface  276  is generally an annular ring extending about the periphery of the canister body  166 , and radially therefrom, that defines an upper ridge  278 . The front latch  154  is generally a flag-shaped resiliently flexible member, e.g., a compliant mechanism or a spring-biased component. The front latch  154  includes a body  280  connected with the motor housing  124  and a slanted head  282  forming an engagement surface  284 . When the canister subassembly  121  is placed over the mounting boss  152 , a downward force thereon results in the locking interface  276  contacting the slanted head  282  of the front latch  154  and forcing the front latch  154  to slightly bend at the body  280  forcing the slanted head  282  forward. Once the canister subassembly  121  is forced completely down, so that the entirety of the locking interface  276  is lower than slanted head  282 , the front latch  154  snaps back to its original up-right position and the canister subassembly  121  is removably “locked” in position. In this “locked” position, the engagement surface  284  of the front latch  154  is adjacent and engages the upper ridge  278  of the locking interface  276 , such that an attempt to remove the canister subassembly  121  from the motor housing  124  is prevented through the engagement of the engagement surface  284  and the upper ridge  278 . Accordingly, in the “locked” position, the canister subassembly  121  can not be removed from the motor housing  124  without first disengaging the front latch  154 . To disengage the front latch  154 , and, thus, to remove the canister subassembly  121 , a user must bias the front latch  154  forward so that there is clearance between the engagement surface  284  and the upper ridge  278 . Removal of the canister subassembly  121  from the motor housing  124  is shown in  FIG. 13B , which is an enlarged view of the retention latch of  FIG. 13A  deformed by a force F. As can be seen in  FIG. 13B , to remove the canister subassembly  121 , a user can exert a force F against the slanted head  282  of the front latch  154 , forcing the slanted head  282  forward and bending the body  280 . This results in the engagement surface  284  of the front latch  154  disengaging the upper ridge  278  of the locking interface  276 , thus providing clearance therebetween and permitting the canister subassembly  121  to be removed from engagement with the motor housing  124 . 
     The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120  can include a plurality of sealing members  274 , e.g., O-rings, disposed between adjacent parts to create a fluid-tight seal therebetween. For example, sealing members  274  can be positioned in the channel  150  of the intake  126 , in the mounting ridge  198  of the canister body  166 , between the annular sealing ring  227  of the cyclone manifold  176  and the dish  202  of the fine debris container  172 , between the top plate  242  and the overflow opening  234  of each cyclone body  232 , between the top plate  242  and the upper mounting rim  212  of the cyclone manifold  176 , between the upper mounting rim  212  of the cyclone manifold  176  and the canister body  166 , between the mounting flange  270  of the mounting boss  152  and the central hub  200  of the fine debris container  172 , between the grommet  158  and the mounting boss  152 , and within the locking interface  276 . The sealing members  274  form a generally fluid-tight seal between the various components of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120  as well as between the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120 , the motor housing  124 , and the intake  126 . 
     When the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120  is fully assembled and attached to the motor housing  124  and intake  126 , a plurality of different chambers and flow paths are formed.  FIG. 10A  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  10 A- 10 A of  FIG. 7  showing, among other things, reference numbers for the chambers of the pool cleaner,  FIG. 10B  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  10 B- 10 B of  FIG. 7  showing, among other things, reference numbers for the flow paths within the pool cleaner, and  FIG. 10C  is a sectional view of the pool cleaner taken along line  10 C- 10 C of  FIG. 7  showing, among other things, reference numbers for certain chambers and flow paths of the pool cleaner. A first chamber C 1  is generally formed at the interior of the canister body  166  and as a portion of the inner chamber  186  of the canister body  166 . The first chamber C 1  is generally delineated as being between the inside of the canister body  166 , the outside of the fine debris container  172 , the outside of the cyclone manifold  176 , and the outside of the filtering medium  174 . The first chamber C 1  receives debris-laden water having large and small debris contained therein. Flow of the debris-laden water within the first chamber C 1  is discussed in greater detail below in connection with the flow paths through the cleaner  100 . A second chamber C 2  is generally formed at the interior of the cyclone manifold  176 , and generally delineated as being between the inside of the filtering medium  174 , the inside of the cyclone manifold  176 , the outside of the second tubular wall  254  of the top cap  180 , the bottom of the top plate  242  of the top cap  180 , the central hub  200  of the fine debris container  172 , and the exterior cyclone container body  230  of each individual cyclone container  228 . The second chamber C 2  receives once-filtered debris-laden water from the first chamber C 1 , e.g., water that has small debris contained therein with the large debris filtered out. A third chamber C 3  is generally formed at the cyclone chamber  232  of each individual cyclone container  228 . The third chamber C 3  is generally delineated as being between the interior of a cyclone container body  230 , a vortex finder  250 , and the bottom of the top plate  242 . As such, the third chamber C 3  is at least one third chamber C 3  that is preferably comprised of a plurality of smaller, individual, radially-staggered chambers, e.g., each cyclone chamber  232  of each individual cyclone container  228 , but for ease/clarity of description is referred to simply as a third chamber C 3  and/or as at least one third chamber. The third chamber C 3  receives the once-filtered debris-laden water from the second chamber C 2 . Flow of the once-filtered debris laden water is discussed in greater detail below. A fourth chamber C 4  is generally formed at the interior of the dish  202  of the fine debris container  172 , and generally delineated as being between the interior of the dish  202 , the central hub  200 , the bottom of the discoid body  210  of the cyclone manifold  176 , the outlet nozzle of each individual cyclone container  228 , and the mounting nozzle  240  of each individual cyclone container  228 . The fourth chamber C 4  is a static flow area that receives small debris that is separated out from the once-filtered debris-laden water that passes through the third chamber C 3 . The once-filtered debris-laden water is filtered a second time in the third chamber C 3 , where small debris “falls out” from the water and passes through the debris underflow nozzle  236  of each respective individual cyclone container  228  and into the fourth chamber C 4 . A fifth chamber C 5  extends from the opening  252  of each vortex finder  250  to the central outlet  248  of the top cap  180 . The fifth chamber C 5  is generally delineated by the interior of the plurality of vortex finders  150 , the inner chamber  245  of each of the plurality of arched tubes  244 , the tubular chamber formed by the first and second tubular walls  246 ,  254 , the finger guard  160 , the mounting flange  270  of the mounting boss  152 , the grommet  158 , and the interior of the first tubular wall  246 . Accordingly, the fifth chamber C 5  is a serpentine-like chamber that originates at the opening  252  to each individual vortex finder  250  and extends to the central outlet  248  of the top cap  180 , with the impeller  156 , finger guard  160 , and diffuser  162  being positioned in the fifth chamber C 5 . The fifth chamber C 5  receives twice-filtered water, e.g., water having minimal debris therein, from the third chamber C 3 , and expels the water from the central outlet  248 . 
     Turning now to a description of the flow paths through the cleaner  100 ,  FIGS. 10B, 10C, 11, and 12  are sectional views of the cleaner  100  that illustrate the flow paths therethrough. A first flow path F 1  extends from the inlet opening  142  of the intake  126 , across the channel  146 , out the outlet opening  144 , into the inlet  190  of the canister intake  188 , across the canister intake channel  194 , and out of the tangential outlet  192  where the fluid enters the canister body  166 . Water flowing through the first flow path F 1  is unfiltered water that is laden with large and small debris D L , D S . 
     The second flow path F 2  starts at the end of the first flow path F 1 , e.g., at the tangential outlet  192 , entering the inner chamber  186  of the canister body  166  at the tangential outlet  192 . The second flow path F 2  enters the inner chamber  186  at a tangent to the canister body  166 , the inner chamber  186 , and the first chamber C 1  and is partially directed by the flow director  218  of the cyclone manifold  176  to flow along the inner wall of the canister body  166 . The combination of the tangential entrance of the second flow path F 2  and the flow director  218  results in the generation of a cyclonic/rotational flow within the first chamber C 1  that circles about a central axis A 1  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  120 . The cyclonic flow of the second flow path F 2  within the first chamber C 1  results in large debris particles D L , e.g., debris having an aggregate size (e.g., each dimension) of up to about 1.25 inches, for example, such as, sticks, leaves, grass, coarse sand, fine sand, stones, pebbles, insects, small animals, etc., striking the interior surface of the canister body  166  and the filtering medium  174  and losing velocity, resulting in the large debris particles D L  falling to the bottom of the canister body  166  where they are collected and stored until the canister subassembly  121  is removed from the cleaner  100  and emptied. 
     A third flow path F 3  extends radially inward from the second flow path F 2 , flowing across the filtering medium  174  and the windows  220  of the cyclone manifold  176  into the second chamber C 2 . Fluid and smaller debris D S  are contained in the third flow path F 3 , but the larger debris D L  has been separated out. Accordingly, the fluid in the third flow path F 3  is once-filtered fluid. The third flow path F 3  connects with a fourth flow path F 4  at the tangential inlet  238  to each individual cyclone container  228 . 
     The fourth flow path F 4  enters each individual cyclone container  228  at the respective tangential inlet  238  where it proceeds to the respective cyclone chamber  232 , e.g., third chamber C 3 . The placement of the individual cyclone container&#39;s tangential inlet  238 , e.g., at a tangent to the respective cyclone chamber  232 , results in the fourth flow path F 4  being a cyclonic/rotational flow within each cyclone chamber  232  about a secondary axis A 2  of each individual cyclone container  228 . The fourth flow path F 4  rotates within each individual cyclone container  228  to separate smaller debris D S , e.g., debris having an aggregate size (e.g., each dimension) of up to about 0.080 inches, for example, such as, coarse sand, fine sand, silt, dirt, insects, etc., based on the ratio of the smaller debris&#39; D S  centripetal force to fluid resistance from the fluid stream of the fourth flow path F 4 . More specifically, the fourth flow path F 4  travels along the interior wall of the respective cyclone container body  230  and travels downward along the cyclone container body  230  toward the debris underflow nozzle  236  where the cyclone container body  230  beings to taper. As the fourth flow path F 4  travels toward the tapered end of the cyclone container body  230 , the rotational radius of the fourth flow path F 4  is reduced. As the rotational radius of the fourth flow path F 4  is reduced, the larger and denser particles of the smaller debris particles D S  within the fourth flow path F 4  have too much inertia to follow the continually reducing rotational radius of the fourth flow path F 4  causing the smaller debris particles D S  to contact the cyclone container body  230  and fall to the bottom where the small debris particles D S  falls through the respective debris underflow nozzle  236  and into the fourth chamber C 4  where it is collected and stored by the fine debris container  172  until the canister subassembly  121  is removed from the cleaner  100  and emptied. The fine debris container  172  can include holes or slots in the dish  202  thereof that allow the small debris particles D S  to fall into the lower portion  170  of the canister body  166  or fall out from the fine debris container  172  when the canister body  166  is opened. The result of the above description is that smaller and smaller debris is separated from the fluid flowing in the fourth flow path F 4  as the fourth flow path F 4  proceeds down the tapered portion of the cyclone container body  230  forming an inner vortex. Additionally, as the fluid within the fourth flow path F 4  reaches the bottom of the tapered portion of the cyclone container body  230 , and the inner vortex, it slows down causing the fluid therein to be pulled upward through the respective vortex finder  250  as twice-filtered fluid and enter the fifth chamber C 5  where it merges with the fifth flow path F 5 . 
     The fifth flow path F 5  connects with the fourth flow path F 4  at the opening  252  to each vortex finder  250  where twice-filtered fluid enters the fifth chamber C 5 . The fifth flow path F 5  extends from the opening  252  of each vortex finder  250 , across each inner chamber  245 , into and across the tubular chamber  256 , across the plurality of fins  268  of the finger guard  160 , underneath the inner cylindrical wall  264 , through the center of the inner cylindrical wall  264 , out from the finger guard  160 , through the diffuser  162 , through the center of the first annular wall  246  of the top cap  180 , and exits through the central outlet  248  of the top cap  180 . That is, the fifth flow path F 5  completely traverses the fifth chamber C 5 . 
     Accordingly, the larger cyclonic/rotational flow of the second flow path F 2  flows about the central axis A 1 , while the smaller cyclonic/rotational flows of the fourth flow path F 4  are formed and flow about the secondary axis A 2  of each individual cyclone container  228 , thus resulting in a plurality of smaller cyclonic/rotational flows within a larger cyclonic/rotational flow. 
     The flow of fluid through the cleaner  100 , e.g., the five flow paths F 1 , F 2 , F 3 , F 4 , F 5 , is generated by the impeller  156  that is driven by the third motor (not shown) and positioned inline with the central outlet  248  of the top cap  180 . The impeller  156  functions to discharge fluid through the central outlet  248  of the top cap  180 , thus pulling fluid in reverse sequence through the cleaner  100 . More specifically, the impeller  156  accelerates fluid through the central outlet  248  resulting in fluid being pulled sequentially through the fifth flow path F 5 , the fourth flow path F 4 , the third flow path F 3 , the second flow path F 2 , and then the first flow path F 1  where the debris-laden fluid enters the cleaner  100  at the intake  126  through a suction effect generated at the inlet opening  142  of the intake  126 . 
     As such, debris-laden fluid flowing through the cleaner  100  is filtered twice by particle separation due to the cyclones generated in the first chamber C 1  and the third chamber C 4 . Utilizing the cyclonic flows within the cleaner  100  to separate the particles and drop the particles out of the flow path results in the retention of suction performance throughout the cleaner, as there is no opportunity for the debris particles to clog the filtering elements. This allows for optimum fluid flow performance through entire cleaning cycles, longer cleaner run times between debris removal, and the collection of more debris before needing to empty the canister subassembly  121 . As is known in the art, the outward flow of clean fluid results in an opposing force, which, as is also known in the art, can be relied upon in navigation of the pool cleaner for the purpose of forcing a pool cleaner downward against the floor when the pool cleaner is traversing the floor and sideways against a wall, when the pool cleaner is traversing a wall of the pool. 
     Turning now to the release means  184  for disengaging the upper and lower portions  168 ,  170  of the canister body  166  (e.g., quick-release latch),  FIG. 15A  is an enlarged view of the Area  15 A of  FIG. 11  showing the quick-release latch  184  of the present disclosure in greater detail. The quick-release latch  184  includes a generally flag-shaped body  286  having a shaped head  288  at a first end and a user-engageable tab  290  at a second end opposite the first end, a pivot  292  disposed between the shaped head  288  and the user-engageable tab  290 , and a spring  294  extending from the body  286 . The spring  294  can be a resiliently flexible member integral with the body  286 , e.g., a compliant mechanism, or it can be a torsion spring, compression spring, or any other spring mechanism known to one of skill in the art. The body  286  is mounted to a bracket  296  extending from the top portion  168  of the canister body  166  by the pivot  292  such that the body  286  is rotatable about the pivot  292 . When the body  286  is interconnected with the bracket  296  the spring  294  is positioned between the body  286  and the canister body  166 . The quick-release latch  184  is configured to engage a ridge  298  that extends radially outwardly from the lower portion  170  of the canister body  166 . Particularly, the shaped head  288  includes a latching surface  300  that is configured to overlap the ridge  298  when the quick-release latch  184  is in a first position, e.g., a “locked” or “engaged” position. When in the first position, the spring  294  engages the canister body  166  biasing the user-engageable tab  290  away from the canister body  166  and the shaped head  288  toward the canister body  166 , e.g., the spring  294  biases the quick-release latch  184  rotationally about the pivot  292 . In this first position, the latching surface  300  overlaps the ridge  298  preventing the upper portion  168  and the lower portion  170  of the canister body  166  from being separated. However, a user can apply a force in the direction of arrow F against the user-engageable tab  290  to place the quick-release latch  184  in a second position, e.g., an “unlocked” or “disengaged” position.  FIG. 15B  is an enlarged view of the quick-release latch  184  in the second position. As can be seen in  FIG. 15B , as a force is applied to the user-engageable tab  290  in the direction of arrow F the spring  294  is compressed between the user-engageable tab  290  and the canister body  166 , resulting in the user-engageable tab  290  moving toward the canister body  166  and the shaped head  288  away from the canister body  166  and the ridge  298 . Movement of the shaped head  288  away from the canister body  166  and the ridge  298  results in clearance between the shaped head  288  (and the latching surface  300 ) and the ridge  298  so that the upper and lower portions  168 ,  170  of the canister body  166  can be rotated apart from one another about the hinge  182 , as shown in  FIG. 16 , which is a front elevational view of the canister body  166  opened. Removing the force from the user-engageable tab  290  results in the spring  294  pushing the quick-release latch  184  back into the first position, e.g., the user-engageable tab  290  is rotated away from the canister body  166  and the shaped head  288  is rotated toward the canister body  166 . 
     As can be seen in  FIG. 16 , when the quick-release latch  184  is moved into the second position, the lower portion  170  and the upper portion  168  of the canister body  166  are permitted to rotate away from one other about the hinge  182 . Accordingly, as the lower portion  170  is rotated, any large and small debris D L , D S  retained in the lower portion  170  can fall out or be removed therefrom, and any small debris D S  retained by the fine debris container  172  can fall through the holes/slots thereof or be removed therefrom, as illustrated in  FIG. 16 . Additionally, the canister subassembly  121  is configured to retain water during cleaning, which can be swirled around the inside of the canister subassembly  121  during cleaning to ensure that all debris is in suspension and thus assist with flushing out the large and small debris D L , D S . This configuration allows a user to remove the debris D L , D S  from the canister body  166  without having to touch the debris D L , D S . 
     One of ordinary skill in the art should appreciate that the release means  184  could be any suitable means for engaging the upper and lower portions  168 ,  170  of the canister body  166 . For example, the release means  184  could be a mating component arrangement, a sliding spring latch, a rotatable spring latch, or any other known latching assemblies. 
     In operation, to empty the canister body  166  a user would first disconnect the canister subassembly  121  from the motor housing  124  by pressing forward against the front latch  154 , as shown in  FIG. 13B , to disengage the front latch  154  from the locking interface  276 , and then removing the canister subassembly  121  from the motor housing  124  by pulling in the direction of arrows U shown in  FIG. 14 . Once removed, the user would then press the user-engageable tab  290  of the quick-release latch  184  in the direction of arrow F of  FIG. 15A  to disengage the shaped head  288  of the quick-release latch  184  from the ridge  298 , as shown in  FIG. 15B . Upon disengagement of the shaped head  288  from the ridge  298  the upper and lower portions  168 ,  170  of the canister body  166  are permitted to rotate away from one another about the hinge  182 , thus opening the canister subassembly  121 . The user would then further separate the upper and lower portions  168 ,  170 , and turn the lower portion  170  upside down allowing the large and small debris D L  and D S  to fall from the lower portion  170 , and the small debris D S  to fall from the fine debris container  172 , e.g., through the holes/slots thereof. To close the canister subassembly  121  a user would rotate the upper and lower portions  168 ,  170  toward one another about the hinge  182  until the ridge  298  engages the shaped head  288 . Continued force by the user will cause for the ridge  298  to push the shaped head  288  away from the canister body  166 , that is, the spring  294  will become compressed, until the canister body  166  is closed with the ridge  298  clearing the shaped head  288 . Once the ridge  298  clears the shaped head  288 , the shaped head  288  is biased by the spring  294  toward the canister body  166  placing the latching surface  300  adjacent the ridge  298  and thus locking the canister body  166 . The user then places the canister subassembly  121  over the mounting boss  152  and aligns the inlet  190  of the canister intake  188  with outlet  144  of the intake  126 . Next, the user exerts a downward force on the canister subassembly  121  so that the locking interface  276  contacts the slanted head  282  of the front latch  154  and forces the front latch  154  to slightly bend at the body  280  such that the slanted head  282  is forced forward. Once the canister subassembly  121  is forced completely down so that the entirety of the locking interface  276  is lower than slanted head  282 , the front latch  154  snaps back to its original up-right position and the canister subassembly  121  is removably “locked” in position, as shown in  FIG. 13B . 
     In other aspects of the present disclosure, the canister subassembly  121  can be provided with a handle to facilitate handling thereof by a user. 
     Further discussion shall now be had with respect to example embodiments of a drive system  110 . As discussed above with reference to  FIG. 2 , for example, a first one of the drive rollers  130  is operatively connected to a first drive motor (not shown) inside the motor housing  124  and a first roller set (rollers  128   a ,  128   c , and  128   e ) for mechanical communication of the driving force thereto, and such that the rollers  128   a ,  128   c , and  128   e  rotate at the same first rate. As also discussed above with reference to  FIG. 2 , for example, a second one of the drive rollers  130  is operatively connected to a second drive motor (not shown) inside the motor housing  124  and a second roller set (rollers  128   b ,  128   d , and  128   f ) for mechanical communication of the driving force thereto, and such that the rollers  128   b ,  128   d , and  128   f  rotate at the same second rate. 
     In the disclosure of the embodiments of  FIGS. 1-16 , gear trains can be provided that are not shown, but can be internal of the other components and/or positioned centrally proximal the ends of the rollers  128   a - f  that are proximate to the motor housing  124 . For example, a first gear train can be provided for mechanical linkage and translation of drive from the first roller drive  130  to the rollers  128   a ,  128   c , and  128   e  of the first roller set, and a second gear train can be provided for mechanical linkage and translation of drive from the second roller drive  130  to the rollers  128   b ,  128   d , and  128   f  of the second roller set. 
     Referring to  FIGS. 17-19 , it is not required for the first gear train and/or the second gear train to be positioned internally of other components and/or to be positioned at ends of the rollers  128   a - f  that are proximate the motor housing  124 . Indeed, as shown in  FIGS. 17-19 , an example first gear train  302  and an example second gear train  304  can be positioned external of other components and/or at ends of the rollers  128   a - f  that are distal the motor housing  124 . 
     Although electric sources are contemplated, other power sources are also contemplated. For example, the power source can be positive water pressure, as in what is commonly referred to in the pool industry as a “pressure cleaner.” As another example, the power source can negative water pressure, as in what is commonly referred to in the pool industry as a “suction cleaner.” Any power source and/or combinations thereof are contemplated. 
     The first rate and the second rate can be the same or different, depending on the circumstances. For example, where the cleaner desires to move in a straight trajectory, the first rate and the second rate may generally be the same, except whether the pool cleaner detects that other relevant parameters are unequal, such as uneven traction, in which case the first rate and the second rate may be different for a straight trajectory. Where it is desired for the pool cleaner to turn, for example, the first rate and the second rate may be different. Additionally and/or alternatively, the first set of rollers (rollers  128   a ,  128   c , and  128   e ) can rotate in a first direction, while the second roller set (rollers  128   b ,  128   d , and  128   f ) can rotate in a second direction opposite the first direction. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 20-28 , perspective, top, side, exploded and sectional views of a second embodiment of a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  are provided. It should be understood that the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  can be substantially similar in structure and function to the hydrocyclonic particle separator  120  and can be implemented with the pool cleaner  100  when suitable, as understood by one of ordinary skill in the art. 
     The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  includes a canister subassembly and a fluid turbine subassembly. In particular, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  includes a guard (which can be a diffuser  402  e.g., a stator), a top cap  404 , an impeller  406 , an impeller skirt  408 , an impeller retaining ring  466 , a ring  410  of vortex finders  412 , a vortex finder gasket  678 , a shaft  414 , and a ball bearing  416  disposed around the shaft  414 . The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  further includes a cyclone block  418  with a plurality of circumferentially disposed cyclone containers  420 , a first gasket  422 , a second gasket  424 , a filtering assembly  426  including a filtering medium support  428  and a filtering medium  430 , and a fine debris container top  432 , and a fine debris container  434 . The hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  further includes an O-ring  436 , a debris separator ring  438 , a canister body  440 , a gasket  442 , a large debris container  444  that defines the bottom of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 , and a gasket  468  disposed between the large debris container  444  and the fine debris container  434 . 
     The canister body  440  includes an inlet  446  that tangentially introduces fluid into the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . The canister body  440  further includes a locking assembly  448 , the locking assembly  448  including a snap plate  450  disposed on the canister body  440 , a snap spring  452 , a slide cover  454  and screws  456 . The locking assembly  448  can interlock with a complementary extension  458  protruding from a top edge  460  of the large debris container  444 . The large debris container  444  includes a hinge  462  connected to a complementary hinge at a bottom edge  464  of the canister body  440 . The large debris container  444  can thereby pivot at the hinge  462  between an open and a closed position, and the locking assembly  448  can be used to lock the large debris container  444  relative to the canister body  440  to maintain the large debris container  444  in a closed position. 
     The impeller  406  can engaged with the shaft  414  such that rotation of the shaft  414  simultaneously rotates the impeller  406 . The shaft  414  can engage the third motor (not shown), which can be positioned within the mounting boss  152  of the motor housing  124  (see, e.g.,  FIG. 2 ). The bottom edge  464  of the canister body  440  can be hingedly engaged with the large debris container  444  by the hinge  462  and releasably secured to each other by the locking assembly  448  (e.g., a quick-release latch). The gasket  442  can separate the bottom edge  464  of the canister body  440  from the top edge  460  of the large debris container  444 . With additional reference to  FIG. 29 , the canister body  440  generally defines an inner chamber  470  and includes the intake or inlet  446  positioned such that fluid is introduced tangentially into the inner chamber  470 . In particular, the inlet  446  includes a tangential outlet  472  and an intake channel  474  extending between the inlet  446  and the tangential outlet  472 . The tangential intake of fluid through the intake channel  474  results in the generation of a first cyclonic flow within the inner chamber  470 . The canister body  440  defines a substantially cylindrical configuration with substantially similar top and bottom edge openings  476 ,  478 . In some embodiments, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  can include a check valve (not shown) for regulating the amount of fluid flow passing through the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . In some embodiments, the check valve can be disposed at or near the inlet  446  of the canister body  440 . 
     With additional reference to  FIG. 30 , the large debris container  444  includes a central hub  480  surrounded by a dish  482  extending radially rom the central hub  480 . In some embodiments, the dish  482  can have an upwardly-curving shape such that the dish  482  catches any debris that falls into the dish  482  and forms a static area where falling debris can land. In some embodiments, the dish  482  can include a substantially planar bottom surface with upwardly angled side walls  484 . The central hub  480  includes a top opening  486  through which one end of the shaft  414  can pass to engage the third motor. In some embodiments, the bottom surface of the large debris container  444  can include a honeycomb pattern of ribs  488 . The ribs  488  can reduce the overall weight of the large debris container  444  while providing structural support. The entire volume of the dish  482  can be disposed below the canister body  440 . 
     The gasket  442  separates the perimeter of the bottom edge  464  of the canister body  440  from the top edge  460  of the large debris container  444 . With reference to  FIGS. 31 and 32 , the gasket  442  defines a substantially L-shaped cross-section including a vertical portion  498  extending perpendicularly from a horizontal portion  500 . The proximal end of the horizontal portion  500  connects to the vertical portion  498  while an opposing distal end of the horizontal portion  500  includes a curved extension  502 . The curved extension  502  bends downward and away from the vertical portion  498 . The vertical portion  498  includes a perpendicular protrusion  504  extending from an inner surface  506 . The horizontal portion  500  includes a perpendicular protrusion  508  extending from an inner surface  510 . In some embodiments, the perpendicular protrusion  508  can be located at the distal end of the horizontal portion  500 . The perpendicular protrusions  504 ,  508  form a channel  512  therebetween. 
     The channel  512  can be configured and dimensioned to receive the bottom edge  464  of the canister body  440 . In some embodiments, the perpendicular protrusions  504 ,  508  create a friction fit between the gasket  442  and the canister body  440 , thereby ensuring continued attachment of the gasket  442  relative to the canister body  440 . The radius  514  of curvature of the curved extension  502  can be selected to be substantially complementary to the upwardly angled side walls  484  of the large debris container  444 . Thus, when the large debris container  444  is positioned in a closed position, the gasket  442  can mate against the upwardly angled side walls  484  of the large debris container  444  to create a water-tight seal between the large debris container  444  and the canister body  440 . 
     The debris separator ring  438  can be in the form of a cylindrical mesh ring including a central opening  490 , and defining an outer circumferential edge  492  and an inner circumferential edge  494 . The outer circumferential edge  492  can define a cross-sectional width dimensioned smaller than a cross-sectional width of the inner circumferential edge  494 . In some embodiments, the cross-sectional width can gradually taper and increase in dimension from the outer circumferential edge  492  to the inner circumferential edge  494 . A portion of the debris separator ring  438  extending radially from the outer circumferential edge  492  towards the inner circumferential edge  494  can include a plurality of radial apertures  496  (e.g., one or more rows of apertures  496 ) formed therein. In some embodiments, the apertures  496  can extend substantially halfway from the outer circumferential edge  492  to the inner circumferential edge  494 . 
     In the assembled configuration of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 , the debris separator ring  438  can be disposed spaced upward relative to the bottom edge  464  of the canister body and, therefore, spaced upward relative to the large debris container  444  (see, e.g.,  FIG. 25 ). The diameter of the outer circumferential edge  492  of the debris separator ring  438  is dimensioned smaller than the diameter of the canister body  440  and the top edge  460  of the large debris container  444 . Therefore, during cyclonic separation of the fluid, large debris can pass between the outer circumferential edge  438  and the inner surface of the canister body  440 , and further can be collected in the large debris container  444 . The apertures  496  in the debris separator ring  438  allow fluid to travel therethrough, thereby not completely isolating the large debris container  444  from the fluid flow, while preventing the large debris from being removed from the large debris container  444  by the fluid flow. In particular, the debris separator ring  438  acts as a barrier for large debris, prevents the large debris collected in the large debris container  444  from reentering the fluid flow, and maintains the large debris collected in the large debris container  444 . 
     With additional reference to  FIGS. 33 and 34 , side and sectional views of the fine debris container  434  are provided. The fine debris container  434  includes a dish  516  with an outer perimeter  518  and an inner perimeter  520 , the surface of the dish  516  sloping downwardly towards a central vertical axis  522 . The fine debris container  434  includes a central opening  524  formed at the inner perimeter  520 . The central opening  524  extends through a central radial extension  526 . The central opening  524  defines a first diameter  528  at or near a proximal end  530  of the central radial extension  526  and defines a second diameter  532  at a distal end  534  of the central radial extension  526 . The radial wall of the central radial extension  526  can taper in the direction of the central vertical axis  522  such that the first diameter  528  is dimensioned greater than the second diameter  532 . The tapered radial wall of the central radial extension  526  assists in transfer of fine debris from the dish  516  to an area near the distal end  534  of the central radial extension  526 . 
     The fine debris container  434  includes a vertical circumferential flange  536  extending from the outer perimeter  518  of the dish  516 . The vertical circumferential flange  536  includes a first horizontal lip  538  extending perpendicularly from a top surface  540  of the vertical circumferential flange  536 . The vertical circumferential flange  536  includes a second horizontal lip  542  extending parallel to the first horizontal lip  538  and disposed between the first horizontal lip  538  and the outer perimeter  518 . During assembly, the O-ring  436  can be positioned between the first and second horizontal lips  538 ,  542  to maintain a water-tight seal between the fine debris container  434  and the fine debris container top  432 . 
     The inner surface  544  of the dish  516  includes a plurality of upwardly extending bulbs  546 . The bulbs  546  can be radially formed on the inner surface  544 . In some embodiments, the fine debris container  434  includes a first row of bulbs  546  radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  522  near the outer perimeter  518  of the dish  516 , and further includes a second row of bulbs  546  radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  522  near the inner perimeter  520  of the dish  516 . Each of the bulbs  546  near the outer perimeter  518  can define a first height relative to the inner surface  544 , and each of the bulbs  546  near the inner perimeter  520  can define a second height relative to the inner surface  544 , the first height being dimensioned smaller than the second height. Each of the bulbs  546  includes a radial wall  548 , a top surface  550  and an opening  552  formed in the top surface  550 . Each of the bulbs  546  further includes a cavity  554  formed within the radial wall  548  and connected with the opening  552 , the cavity  554  extending to the outer surface  556  of dish  516 . 
     With additional reference to  FIGS. 35 and 36 , top and sectional views of the fine debris container top  432  are provided. The fine debris container top  432  defines a substantially circular outer perimeter wall  558  and a central opening  560  formed in the top surface  562 . The fine debris container top  432  includes a central radial extension  564  protruding from an inner surface  566  of the fine debris container top  432 . The central radial extension  564  includes an interior cavity  568  that connects with the central opening  560 . The radial wall of the central radial extension  564  can taper gradually such that the thickness of the radial wall is greater near the inner surface  566  than the thickness of the radial wall at a distal end  570  of the central radial extension  564 . 
     The outer perimeter wall  558  can extend downwardly from the top surface  562  to form an enclosed cavity  572  between the outer perimeter wall  558  and the central radial extension  564 . The top surface  562  includes a circumferential polygonal edge  574  from which a plurality of plates  576  extend. The plates  576  can be angled downwardly relative to a central portion  578  of the top surface  562  (and a central vertical axis  580 ) and form the perimeter of the fine debris container top  432 . The central portion  578  of the top surface  562  includes a plurality of radial openings  582  formed therein and circumferentially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  580 . Each of the plates  576  includes an opening  584  formed therein. The openings  582 ,  584  can be configured and dimensioned to receive the distal ends of the respective cyclone containers  420 . 
     With reference to  FIG. 25 , during assembly, the central radial extension  564  of the fine debris container top  432  can be positioned concentrically within the central radial extension  526  of the fine debris container  434 . The distal end  570  of the central radial extension  564  and the distal end  534  of the central radial extension  526  can be positioned against the gasket  468  of the large debris container  444  to create a water-tight seal therebetween. As will be discussed in greater detail below, fine debris filtered from the fluid flow during a second cyclonic filtering stage can be deposited in the cavity or chamber formed between the central radial extensions  526 ,  564  and the gasket  468 . 
     As shown in  FIG. 25 , the gasket  468  can include first and second radial extensions  598 ,  600 . The first radial extension  598  can seal against the distal end  570  of the central radial extension  564  of the fine debris container top  432 . The second radial extension  600  can be positioned against the central hub  480  of the large debris container  444  and seals against the distal end  534  of the central radial extension  526  of the fine debris container  434 . The gasket  468  further includes a lower hook section  602  that fits within and hooks around the edge of the top opening  486  of the central hub  480 , thereby fixating the gasket  468  to the central hub  480 . The gasket  468  thereby forms a water-tight seal between the large debris container  444 , the fine debris container  434  and the fine debris container top  432 . 
     It should be understood that when the large debris container  444  is unlatched from the canister body  440  and is in the open position, large debris from the large debris container  444  and fine debris from the cavity or chamber formed between the central radial extensions  526 ,  564  can be simultaneously emptied. In particular, opening the large debris container  444  releases the seal formed between the gasket  468  and the distal ends  534 ,  570  of the central radial extensions  526 ,  564 , allowing the fine debris to be simultaneously emptied from the canister body  440 . 
     With additional reference to  FIG. 37 , a top view of the second gasket  424  is provided. The second gasket  424  can be disposed over the fine debris container top  432 . The gasket body  604  of the second gasket  424  can define a substantially planar and disc-like configuration. The gasket body  604  includes a central opening  606 , a first set of radial openings  608  spaced from a perimeter edge  610 , and a second set of radial openings  612  between the central opening  606  and the first set of radial openings  608 . The position of the first and second set of radial openings  608 ,  612  can correspond to the position of the radial openings  582 ,  584  of the fine debris container top  432 . Each of the openings  608 ,  612  of the first and second set of radial openings  608 ,  612  includes a smaller sized opening  614  formed adjacent thereto. In some embodiments, the gasket body  604  can include one or more radial slots  616  aligned with corresponding openings  608  of the first set of radial openings  608 . 
     As noted above, the filtering assembly  426  includes the filtering medium support  428  and the filtering medium  430 . The filtering medium support  428  includes a support body  586  defining a frustoconical configuration. The support body  586  includes a top circumferential frame  588  and a bottom circumferential frame  590 . A diameter of the top circumferential frame  588  can be dimensioned greater than a diameter of the bottom circumferential frame  590 . The support body  586  further includes a plurality of windows  592  formed between the top and bottom circumferential frames  588 ,  590 . In some embodiments, the windows  592  can be dimensioned substantially similarly relative to each other. In some embodiments, one section of the support body  586  can include a plurality of vertical slit windows  594  that are dimensioned smaller than the windows  592 . During assembly, the vertical slit windows  594  can be positioned to face the tangential outlet  472  of the canister body  440 . The vertical slit windows  594  provide structural support to the filtering assembly  426  against fluid flow entering the canister body  440  through the tangential outlet  472 . In some embodiments, the support body  586  can include a circumferential wall  596  extending downwardly from the bottom circumferential frame  590 . The diameter of the circumferential wall  596  can be dimensioned such that during assembly, the circumferential wall  596  mates with the debris separator ring  438 . 
     The filtering medium  430  (e.g., a mesh, filter, polymesh, or the like) can be received by the support body  586  such that the filtering medium  430  covers each of the windows  492  and the vertical slit windows  594 . In particular, the filtering medium  430  extends the perimeter wall of the filtering assembly  426 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, in a first cyclonic separation stage, the filtering assembly  426  can filter out a first debris size, e.g., large debris, from the fluid flow with the large debris dropping into the large debris container  444 . In particular, the large debris contacts the filtering medium  430 , or the interior wall of the canister body  440 , and is knocked down out of the fluid flow and does not enter the interior of the filtering assembly  426 . The fluid flow with at least some fine debris can continue through the filtering assembly  426  and into the cyclone block  418 . 
     With additional reference to  FIGS. 38-40 , the cyclone block  418  includes a cyclone block body  618  in the form of a cylindrical disc with a central opening  620  formed in the cyclone block body  618 . The first gasket  422  can be disposed within grooves on an outer surface of the cyclone block body  618 . In some embodiments, the first gasket  422  can define a U-shaped cross-section. The cyclone block body  618  includes a plurality of individual cyclone containers  420  radially disposed relative to a central vertical axis  622 . In particular, the cyclone block  418  includes a first set of cyclone containers  624  radially disposed around the central opening  620  and a second set of cyclone containers  626  radially disposed around the first set of cyclone containers  624 . 
     Each of the cyclone containers  420  of the first set of cyclone containers  624  can extend substantially parallel to the central vertical axis  622 . Each of the cyclone containers  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626  can extend in an angled manner relative to the central vertical axis  622  (e.g., angled with a bottom of the cyclone container  626  in the direction of the central vertical axis  622 ). In particular, a central axis A 1  of each of the cyclone containers  420  of the first set of cyclone containers  624  can be substantially parallel to the central vertical axis  622 , while a central axis A 2  of each of the cyclone containers  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626  can be angled relative to the central vertical axis  622 . In particular, a cylindrical top portion  638  of each of the second set of cyclone containers  626  can be disposed further from the central vertical axis  622  than a debris underflow nozzle  634 . 
     It should be understood that the description of a single cyclone container  420  holds true for all of the cyclone containers  420  that make up the ring of cyclone containers  420  (i.e., the cyclone block  418 ), unless noted otherwise. Each cyclone container  420  includes a circular tapered container body  628  that defines a cyclone chamber  630  and includes an overflow opening  632 , a debris underflow nozzle  634 , and a tangential inlet  636  generally positioned on a radially inward portion of each cyclone container  420 . Each cyclone container  420  generally includes a cylindrical top portion  638  and a frustoconical bottom portion  640  that tapers downward to the debris underflow nozzle  634 . The frustoconical bottom portion  640  aids in maintaining a centrifugal acceleration of the fluid flow as the fluid travels downward along the interior of the frustoconical bottom portion  640  in the direction of the debris underflow nozzle  634 . In some embodiments, the tangential inlet  636  of every other cyclone container  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626  can be in fluid communication with the tangential inlet  636  of a respective cyclone container  420  of the first set of cyclone containers  624  via a passage  642 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, fluid passing through the filtering assembly  426  enters the inner chamber  470  of the canister body  440  around the frustoconical bottom portions  640  of the cyclone containers  420  and travels upward into the respective tangential inlets  636  of the cyclone containers  420 . Therefore, fluid enters each of the cyclone chambers  630  of the first and second set of cyclone containers  624 ,  626  substantially simultaneously and forms individual cyclones within the cyclone containers  420 . A concentric, dual-cyclone configuration within the cyclone block  418  is thereby formed. 
     Each of the frustoconical bottom portions  640  can be configured and dimensioned to be partially received within the radial openings  582 ,  584  of the fine debris container top  432  such that fine debris filtered by the cyclone containers  420  falls through the debris underflow nozzle  634  and into the fine debris container  434 . Thus, the fine debris container top  432  maintains the debris underflow nozzles  634  suspended over or spaced from the dish  516  of the fine debris container  434 . Accordingly, debris falls out of the debris-laden water within each individual cyclone container  420 , e.g., due to contact with the wall of the cyclone container body  628 , and falls through the debris underflow nozzle  634  and into the fine debris container  434 . During assembly, as shown in  FIG. 25 , the frustoconical bottom portions  640  of the cyclone containers  420  are positioned within and surrounded by the filtering assembly  426 . Thus, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  includes a dual cyclone system with the first cyclone occurring between the canister body  440  and the filtering assembly  426 , and the second cyclones occurring in each of the cyclone containers  420 . 
     The shaft  414  includes a proximal end  642  and a distal end  644 . The proximal end  642  can include a tip  646  configured to mate with a complementary opening  648  of the impeller  406 . Thus, rotation of the shaft  414  simultaneously drives rotation of the impeller  406 . The tip  646  allows the impeller  406  to be removably attached to the shaft  414 . The distal end  644  includes a female member  650  configured to mate with a male member of the third motor (e.g., a spline coupling, or the like). The third motor can thereby drive rotation of the shaft  414 . The shaft  414  can pass through the central openings of the components of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  with the distal end  644  being positioned over the central hub  480  of the large debris container  444 . The male member of the third motor can pass through the opening  468  of the central hub  480  and engages the female member  650  to rotate the shaft  414  within the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . 
     With additional reference to  FIGS. 41-43 , perspective, top and sectional views of the ring  410  of vortex finders  412  are provided. The ring  410  includes a ring body  652  with a central portion  654  with a polygonal perimeter  656 , and a plurality of perimeter flaps  658  extending from the polygonal perimeter  656 . The central portion  654  can be recessed relative to the perimeter flaps  658 , with respective angled wall sections  660  connecting the central portion  654  to the perimeter flaps  658 . 
     The ring body  652  includes a central opening  662 , a first set of vortex finders  664  radially disposed around the central opening  662 , and a second set of vortex finders  666  radially disposed around the first set of vortex finders  664 . The central opening  662  can be formed in a central hub  668  that is raised relative to the recessed central portion  654 . Each of the vortex finders  412  of the first set of vortex finders  664  can extend substantially parallel to a central vertical axis  670 . Each of the vortex finders  412  of the second set of vortex finders  666  can be angled relative to the central vertical axis  670 . In particular, the angle of the second set of vortex finders  666  can be substantially equal to the angle of the cyclone containers  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626 . In some embodiments, the perimeter flaps  658  can be hingedly connected to the angled wall sections  660  such that the angle of each vortex finder  412  can be individually adjusted relative to the central vertical axis  670 . During assembly, the vortex finders  412  of the first set of vortex finders  664  can be positioned at least partially into the cyclone containers  420  of the first set of cyclone containers  624 , and the vortex finders  412  of the second set of vortex finders  666  can be positioned at least partially into the cyclone containers  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626 . 
     Each of the vortex finders  412  includes a planar top surface  672  and a cylindrical extension  674  protruding downwardly from the planar top surface  672 . Each cylindrical extension  674  includes a uniform channel  676  passing therethrough. When positioned within the respective cyclone containers  420 , the vortex finders  412  assist in generating a vortex within the cyclone containers  420  such that debris of a second size (e.g., fine debris) hits the inner walls of the cyclone container  420  and travels downwardly through the frustoconical bottom portion  640 , through the debris underflow nozzle  634  and into the fine debris container  434 . 
     With additional reference to  FIG. 44 , a top view of the vortex finder gasket  678  is provided. The vortex finder gasket  678  can be substantially disc-shaped and includes a gasket body  680 . The gasket body  680  includes a central opening  682 , a first set of openings  684  radially disposed around the central opening  682 , and a second set of openings  686  radially disposed around the first set of openings  684 . The positions of the first and second set of openings  684  can correspond to the vortex finders  412  of the ring  410 . During assembly, the respective vortex finders  412  can be inserted through the openings  684 ,  686  such that the vortex finder gasket  678  is disposed against the bottom surface of the ring body  652 . The gasket body  680  includes a plurality of radial protrusions  688  adjacent to the second set of openings  684  that substantially match the configuration of the top surface  672  of the second set of vortex finders  666 . The radial protrusions  688  define the perimeter edge of the vortex finder gasket  678 . 
     The top cap  404  includes a top plate  690  with a plurality of rounded lobes  692  extending from the perimeter of the top plate  690 . The number of rounded lobes  692  can equal the number of cyclone containers  420  in the second set of cyclone containers  624  and the number of vortex finders  412  in the second set of vortex finders  666 . Each of the rounded lobes  692  extends through the top plate  690  and converges at a central cavity  694  within the top cap  404 . The cavity  694  forms a tubular wall  696  defining an outlet  698  of the top cap  404 . The tubular wall  696  can extend upwardly relative to the surface of the top plate  690 . The diffuser  402  can be positioned over the outlet  698  to promote suction of fluid out of the cavity  694 . In some embodiments, the top cap  404  can include a handle  405  extending from the top cap  404  to allow for removal of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  from the motor housing (see, e.g.,  FIGS. 27 and 28 ). In particular, a user can grasp the handle  405  to disengage the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  from the motor housing. 
     When assembled, each of the rounded lobes  692  is positioned over the respective vortex finder  412  and cyclone container  420  such that fluid can exit the cyclone container  420  through the respective vortex finder  412 , travels into the cavity  694 , and out of the outlet  698 . Thus, individual fluid cyclonic flows within the cyclone block  418  can merge within the cavity  694  prior to being expelled from the outlet  698 . The top cap  404  can be secured to the cyclone block  418  by a plurality of screws or bolts. A plurality of screws of bolts can similarly be used to secure the fine debris container top  432 , the fine debris container  434  and the canister body  440 . The large debris container  444  can be placed in a closed position by positioning the large debris container  444  against the gasket  442 , and the extension  458  of the large debris container  444  can be engaged with the locking assembly  448 . In particular, the extension  458  can be flexed outwardly to position the large debris container  444  against the gasket  442 , and released to allow a curved hook of the extension  458  to engage a protrusion of the locking assembly  448 . The slide cover  454  can be positioned over the snap plate  450  to maintain engagement of the extension  458  with the locking assembly  448 . 
     With reference to  FIGS. 45-49 , perspective, top, side and bottom views of a second embodiment of an exemplary pool cleaner  700  are provided. The pool cleaner  700  includes an outer housing or skin (not shown) in which one or more components of the pool cleaner  700  can be enclosed. The pool cleaner  700  can be implemented with the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  discussed above. The pool cleaner  700  generally includes a drive assembly  702  and a motor assembly  704 . In an exemplary embodiment, the pool leaner  700  is an electric pool cleaner that includes six rollers and the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . The motor assembly  704  can be powered by an electric cable (not shown) extending to a power source at the surface of the swimming pool, a battery and/or inductive coupling, for example. 
     The drive assembly  702  includes a motor housing  706 , an intake  708 , six brushed rollers  710   a - f , a first roller drive  712  and a second roller drive  714 . The first and second roller drives  712 ,  714  are positioned on opposite sides of the motor housing  706 . Each of the roller drives  712 ,  714  is respectively in operative communication with a first and second motor (not shown) positioned within the motor housing  706 . A first roller set (rollers  710   a ,  710   c ,  710   e ) is in mechanical communication with the first roller drive  712 , which is in communication with the first drive motor so that each of the rollers of the first roller set (e.g., rollers  710   a ,  710   c ,  710   e ) turn in the same direction and independently from a second roller set (rollers  710   b ,  710   d ,  710   f ). In some embodiments, each of the rollers of the first roller set (rollers  710   a ,  710   c ,  710   e ) can be independently spun relative to each other. The second roller set (rollers  710   b ,  710   d ,  710   f ) is in mechanical communication with the second roller drive  714 , which is in communication with the second drive motor, so each of the rollers of the second roller set (e.g., rollers  710   b ,  710   d ,  710   f ) turn in the same direction and independently from the first roller set (rollers  710   a ,  710   c ,  710   e ). In some embodiments, the rollers of the first roller set can turn at the same rate, and the rollers of the second roller set can turn at the same rate. For purposes of turning the pool cleaner  700 , the first set of rollers can be driven to turn in a single direction and the second set of rollers can be driven to turn in an opposing direction, thereby generating a moment for turning the pool cleaner  700 . Each of the rollers  710   a - f  can be mounted to roller mounts  716   a - d  of the motor housing  706 . Each of the roller drives  712 ,  714  includes a first drive train  734 ,  736  disposed underneath the motor housing  706  and a second drive train  738 ,  740  disposed on the respective sides of the frame of the pool cleaner  700 . In some embodiments, one or more split bearings  739  can be used in combination with the first and second drive trains  734 ,  736 ,  738 ,  740 . 
     The intake  708  includes a body  718  extending the width of the pool cleaner  700  between the rollers  710   c, d  and the rollers  710   e, f . The intake  708  includes an inlet opening  720  and an outlet opening  722  defined by the body  718 . A channel  724  extends between the inlet opening  720  and the outlet opening  722 . A rim  726  extends about the perimeter of the outlet opening  722  and is configured and dimensioned to cooperate with inlet  446  of the canister body  440 . 
     The motor housing  706  includes a motor shaft  728  with a male member  730  that engages the female member  650  of the shaft  414 . In particular, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  can be mounted over the male member  730  of the motor shaft  728  such that engagement between the motor shaft  728  and the shaft  414  occurs. The motor shaft  728  can thereby drive the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . A locking interface  732  on the motor housing  706  can detachably interlock relative to a bottom surface of the large debris container  444  to interlock the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  with the motor housing  706 . For example, the bottom surface of the large debris container  444  can include a concave portion  445  configured and dimensioned to receive the locking interface  732  of the motor housing  706 . 
     With reference to  FIG. 50 , a bottom view of a third embodiment of an exemplary pool cleaner  742  is provided. The pool cleaner  742  includes an outer housing or skin (not shown) in which one or more components of the pool cleaner  742  can be enclosed. The pool cleaner  742  can be substantially similar in structure and function to the pool cleaner  742 , except for the distinctions noted herein. Therefore, like reference numbers are used for like structures. In particular, rather than including six rollers  710   a - f , the pool cleaner  742  includes four brushed rollers  744   a - d . Specifically, the pool cleaner  742  includes a single front roller  744   a  and a single rear roller  744   d . The pool cleaner  742  includes a first roller drive  746  and a second roller drive  748  positioned on opposite sides of the motor housing  706 . Each of the roller drives  746 ,  748  is in operative communication with respective first and second motors (not shown) positioned within the motor housing  706 . 
     A first roller set (rollers  744   a ,  744   b ) is in mechanical communication with the first roller drive  746 , which is in communication with the first drive motor so that each of the rollers of the first roller set (e.g., rollers  744   a ,  744   b ) turn in the same direction and independently from a second roller set (rollers  744   c ,  744   d ). In some embodiments, each of the rollers of the first roller set ( 744   a ,  744   b ) can be independently spun relative to each other. The second roller set (rollers  744   c ,  744   d ) is in mechanical communication with the second roller drive  748 , which is in communication with the second drive motor, so each of the rollers of the second roller set (e.g.,  744   c ,  744   d ) turn in the same direction and independently from the first roller set ( 744   a ,  744   b ). In some embodiments, the rollers of the first roller set can turn at the same rate, and the rollers of the second roller set can turn at the same rate. 
     During operation, turning capability can be provided by the moment created by the middle split rollers  744   b ,  744   c . In particular, rotation of the rollers  744   b ,  744   c  in their opposing respective directions creates a moment for rotating the pool cleaner  742 . Each of the rollers  744   a - d  can be mounted to roller mounts  750   a - d  of the motor housing  706 . Each of the roller drives  746 ,  748  includes a first drive train  734 ,  736  disposed underneath the motor housing  706  and a second drive train  752 ,  754  disposed on the respective sides of the frame of the pool cleaner  742 . 
     When the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  is fully assembled and attached to the motor housing  706  and intake  708 , a plurality of different chambers and flow paths are formed.  FIG. 25  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  showing, among other things, reference numbers for the chambers and flow paths within the pool cleaner. 
     A first chamber C 1  is generally formed at the interior of the canister body  440  and as a portion of the inner chamber  470  of the canister body  440 . The first chamber C 1  is generally delineated as being between the inside of the canister body  440 , the outside of the filtering assembly  426 , and the outside of the fine debris container  434 . The first chamber C 1  receives debris-laden water having large and small debris contained therein. Flow of the debris-laden water within the first chamber C 1  is discussed in greater detail below. A second chamber C 2  is generally formed at the interior of the large debris container  444 . The second chamber C 2  receives and retains large debris filtered from the water. The third chamber C 3  is generally formed between the outer surfaces of the cyclone containers  420  of the cyclone block  418 , and is generally delineated as being between the inside of the filtering assembly  426 , the outer surfaces of the cyclone containers  420 , the ring body  652  of the ring  410  of vortex finders  412 , and the fine debris container top  432 . The third chamber C 3  receives once-filtered debris-laden water from the first chamber C 1 , e.g., water that has small debris contained therein with the large debris filtered out and retained in the second chamber C 2 . 
     Fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  are generally formed within each of the cyclone containers  420  of the first and second set of cyclone containers  624 ,  626 . In particular, the fourth chamber C 4  is formed within the cyclone containers  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626  and the fifth chamber C 4  is formed within the cyclone containers  420  of the first set of cyclone containers  624 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, once-filtered debris-laden water can enter the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  substantially simultaneously. The fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  are generally delineated as being within the inner chambers  470  of the cyclone containers  420  between the interior of a cyclone container  440  and a vortex finder  412 . The fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  receive the once-filtered debris-laden water from the third chamber C 3 . 
     A sixth chamber C 6  is generally formed at the interior of the fine debris container  434 , and is generally delineated as being between the central radial extension  526  of the fine debris container  434 , the central radial extension  564  of the fine debris container top  432 , and the gasket  468 . The sixth chamber C 6  is a static flow area that receives small debris that is separated out from the once-filtered debris-laden water that passes through the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5 . The once-filtered debris-laden water is filtered a second time in the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5 , where small debris “falls out” from the water and passes through the debris underflow nozzles  634  of each respective individual cyclone container  420  and into the sixth chamber C 6 . 
     The seventh chamber C 7  extends from the uniform channel  676  of each vortex finder  412  to the central outlet  698  of the top cap  404 . The seventh chamber C 7  is generally delineated by the interior of the plurality of vortex finders  412 , the interior chamber of each rounded lobe  692 , the central outlet  698 , the parabolically-shaped outer surface of the impeller skirt  408 , and the top of the diffuser  402 . Accordingly, the seventh chamber C 7  is a lobed chamber that originates at the channel  676  of each individual vortex finder  412  and extends to the central outlet  698  of the top cap  404 , with the impeller  406 , impeller skirt  408  and diffuser  402  being positioned in the seventh chamber C 7 . The seventh chamber C 7  receives the twice-filtered water, e.g., water having minimal debris therein, from the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5 , and expels the filtered water from the central outlet  698 . 
     Turning now to a description of the flow paths through the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 ,  FIG. 25  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  that illustrates the flow paths therethrough. Although not shown in  FIG. 25 , it should be understood that the flow path within the intake  708  of the pool cleaner  700 ,  742  leading to the hydrocyclonic particle separator  400  is substantially similar to the flow paths shown in  FIG. 10C . Thus, a first flow path F 1  extends from the inlet opening  720  of the intake  708 , across the channel  724 , out of the outlet opening  722 , into the inlet  446  of the canister body  440 , across the canister intake channel  474 , and out of the tangential outlet  472  where the fluid enters the canister body  440 . Water flowing through the first flow path F 1  is unfiltered water that is laden with large and small debris D L , D S . 
     The second flow path F 2  starts at the end of the first flow path F 1 , e.g., at the tangential outlet  472 , entering the inner chamber  470  of the canister body  440  at the tangential outlet  472 . The second flow path F 2  enters the inner chamber  470  at a tangent to the canister body  440 , the inner chamber  470 , and the first chamber C 1  and is directed to flow between the inner wall of the canister body  440  and the filtering assembly  426 . The tangential entrance of the second flow path F 2  results in the generation of a cyclonic/rotational flow within the first chamber C 1  that circles about a central axis A 2  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . The cyclonic flow of the second flow path F 2  within the first chamber C 1  results in large debris particles D L , e.g., debris having an aggregate size (e.g., each dimension) of up to about 1.25 inches, for example, such as, sticks, leaves, grass, coarse sand, fine sand, stones, pebbles, insects, small animals, etc., striking the interior surface of the canister body  440  and the filtering assembly  426  and losing velocity, resulting in the large debris particles D L  falling to the bottom of the canister body  440  and into the large debris container  444  (e.g., the second chamber C 2 ) where they are collected and stored until the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  is removed from the pool cleaner and emptied. 
     A third flow path F 3  extends radially inward from the second flow path F 2 , flowing across the filtering medium  430  of the filtering assembly  426  into the third chamber C 3 . Fluid and smaller debris D S  are contained in the third flow path F 3 , but the larger debris D L  has been separated out. Accordingly, the fluid in the third flow path F 3  is once-filtered fluid. The third flow path F 3  enters the third chamber C 3  around the outer surface of the frustoconical bottom portions  640  of the cyclone containers  420  and rises upward in the direction of the cylindrical top portions  638  of the cyclone containers  420 . As the fluid of the third flow path F 3  reaches the tangential inlet  636  of each of the cyclone containers  420 , the third flow path F 3  connects with fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5 . In particular, the third flow path F 3  enters each of the cyclone containers  420  of the first and second set of cyclone containers  624 ,  626  substantially simultaneously as fluid rises to the level of the tangential inlets  636 . 
     The fourth flow path F 4  enters each individual cyclone container  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626  at the respective tangential inlet  636  where it proceeds to the respective cyclone chamber  630 , e.g., the fourth chamber C 4 . Substantially simultaneously to the fourth flow path F 4  entering the cyclone containers  420  of the second set of cyclone containers  626 , the fifth flow path F 5  enters each individual cyclone container  420  of the first set of cyclone containers  624  at the respective tangential inlet  636  where it proceeds to the respective cyclone chamber  630 , e.g., the fifth chamber C 5 . The placement of the individual cyclone container&#39;s tangential inlet  636 , e.g., at a tangent to the respective cyclone chamber  630 , results in the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  being a cyclonic/rotational flow within each cyclone chamber  630 . The fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  rotate within each individual cyclone container  440  of the respective second and first set of cyclone containers  626 ,  624  to separate smaller debris D S , e.g., debris having an aggregate size (e.g., each dimension) of up to about 0.080 inches, for example, such as, coarse sand, fine sand, silt, dirt, insects, etc., based on the ratio of the smaller debris&#39; D S  centripetal force to fluid resistance from the fluid stream of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5 . More specifically, the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  travel along the interior wall of the respective cyclone container  420 , travels downward along the cyclone container  420  through the frustoconical bottom portion  640  where the cyclone container  420  tapers, and toward the debris underflow nozzle  634 . 
     As the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  travel along the frustoconical bottom portion  640 , the rotational radius of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  is reduced. As the rotational radius of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  is reduced, the larger and denser particles of the smaller debris particles D S  within the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  have too much inertia to follow the continually reducing rotational radius of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  causing the smaller debris particles D S  to contact the inner surface of the cyclone container  420  and fall to the bottom where the small debris particles D S  fall through the respective debris underflow nozzles  634  and onto the tapered fine debris container  434 . The tapered configuration of the fine debris container  434  causes the small debris particles D S  to slide downward and into the sixth chamber C 6  where the small debris particles D S  are collected and stored by the fine debris container  434  until the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  is removed from the pool cleaner and emptied. Thus, the small debris particles D S  separated from the water in both the first and second set of cyclone containers  624 ,  626  is collected in the same fine debris container  434  until the pool cleaner is emptied. 
     The result of the above description is that smaller and smaller debris is separated from the fluid flowing in the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  as these flow paths proceed down the frustoconical bottom portions  640  of the respective cyclone containers  420  forming an inner vortex. Additionally, as the fluid within the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  reaches the bottom of the frustoconical bottom portions  640  and the inner vortex, it slows down causing the fluid therein to be pulled upward through the respective vortex finders  412  as twice-filtered fluid. The twice-filtered fluid enters the seventh chamber C 7  where it merges with the sixth flow path F 6 . 
     The sixth flow path F 6  connects with the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  at the top of the channel  676  of each vortex finder  412  where twice-filtered water enters the seventh chamber C 7 . The sixth flow path F 6  extends from the channel  676  of each vortex finder  412 , across each inner lobe  692  of the top cap  404 , into the tubular outlet  698 , and through the diffuser  402  to exit the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . That is, the sixth flow path F 6  completely traverses the seventh chamber C 7 . 
     Accordingly, the larger cyclonic/rotational flow travels about the central axis A 2 , while the smaller cyclonic/rotational flows are formed and flow about the secondary central axes of the individual cyclone containers  420  of the cyclone block  418 , resulting in a plurality of smaller cyclonic/rotational flows within a larger cyclonic/rotational flow. In particular, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400  includes three levels of cyclonic/rotational flow—around the filtering assembly  426 , within the second set of cyclone containers  626 , and within the first set of cyclone containers  624 . 
     As such, debris-laden fluid flowing through the pool cleaner is filtered twice by particle separation due to the generated cyclones. Utilizing the cyclonic flows within the pool cleaner to separate the particles and drop the particles out of the flow path results in the retention of suction performance throughout the cleaner, as there is no opportunity for the debris particles to clog the filtering elements. This allows for optimum fluid flow performance through entire cleaning cycles, longer cleaner run times between debris removal, and the collection of more debris before needing to empty the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  400 . As is known in the art, the outward flow of clean fluid results in an opposing force, which, as is also known in the art, can be relied upon in navigation of the pool cleaner for the purpose of forcing a pool cleaner downward against the floor when the pool cleaner is traversing the floor and sideways against a wall, when the pool cleaner is traversing a wall of the pool. 
     With reference to  FIGS. 51-57 , perspective, front, rear, side, top, and bottom views of a fourth embodiment of an exemplary pool cleaner  800  are provided. The pool cleaner  800  generally includes a pool cleaner body  802  and a third embodiment of a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . The pool cleaner body  802  includes a chassis  806  (see  FIG. 57 ) that many components can be mounted to, which is discussed in greater detail in connection with  FIG. 89 . The pool cleaner body  802  includes left and right covers  808   a ,  808   b , a handle  810 , a front skin  812 , a rear cover  814 , and an inlet top  816 . The left and right skins  808   a ,  808   b , front skin  812 , and rear cover  814  are connected to the chassis  806  and enclose several components of the pool cleaner  800 . The pool cleaner  800  includes six wheels  818   a - 818   f  corresponding to and mechanically engaged with six rollers  820   a - 820   f . The six wheels  818   a - 818   f  are coaxial with the respective six rollers  820   a - 820   f.    
     The wheels  818   a - 818   f  are grouped into a first wheel set (e.g., wheels  818   a ,  818   c ,  818   e ) and a second wheel set (e.g.,  818   b ,  818   d ,  818   f ). Similarly, the rollers  820   a - 820   f  are grouped into a first roller set (e.g., rollers  820   a ,  820   c ,  820   e ) and a second roller set (e.g.,  820   b ,  820   d ,  820   f ). Each of the roller sets are in mechanical communication with a respective drive, which is discussed in greater detail in connection with  FIGS. 89-93  As shown in  FIGS. 54 and 55 , which are side views of the pool cleaner  800 , the wheels  818   a - 818   f  are positioned on the outside of the cleaner body  802  and have a diameter that is less than the diameter of the rollers  820   a - 820   f  so that the wheels  818   a - 818   f  do not contact a surface at all times. Instead, the wheels  818   a - 818   f  are configured to contact a pool or spa surface only during particular circumstances such as when the pool cleaner  800  is traversing a concave or convex surface, attempting to climb a wall, at a transition point to a vertical incline, or at any other time where the rollers  820   a - 820   f  may be disengaged from a pool or spa surface. 
     As shown in  FIG. 57 , which is a bottom view of the pool cleaner  800 , the inlet top  816  is connected with an inlet bottom  822  that extends the width of the pool cleaner  800  between the rollers  820   c ,  820   d  and the rollers  820   e ,  820   f . The inlet bottom  822  includes an opening  824  that allows water and debris to flow through the inlet bottom  822 , across the inlet top  816 , and into the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . The inlet top  816  can also include a debris sensor opening  826  wherein a debris sensor lens  828  can be positioned for monitoring debris as it passes through the inlet top  816 . Reference is made to U.S. Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0244988, published Aug. 25, 2016, which is incorporated by reference herein, describing some example debris sensors and related systems and methods. The chassis  806  also includes a recess  830  that assists in securing the pool cleaner  800  to a caddy which is discussed in detail below in connection with  FIGS. 171-213  A plurality of roller latches  832  and roller mounts  833  are provided for securing the rollers  820   a - 820   f  to the chassis  806 . 
       FIG. 58  is a partially exploded view of the cleaner  800  showing the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  exploded from the pool cleaner body  802 . As shown in  FIG. 58 , the handle  810  is formed of an exterior handle skin  834  mounted to an interior handle structure  836 . The interior handle structure  836  is secured to the chassis  806  to form a rigid component that a user can grab to lift the pool cleaner  800 . The interior handle structure  836  also includes two catches  838  on lateral sides of the pool cleaner body  802  that are used to secure the separator assembly  804  to the pool cleaner body  802 . The pool cleaner  800  additionally includes a motor box  840  that is secured to the chassis  806  and drives the rollers  820   a - 802   f.    
     With reference to  FIGS. 59A-63 , perspective, top, side, and exploded views of the third embodiment hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  are provided. It should be understood that the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  can be substantially similar in structure and function to the hydrocyclonic particle separators  120  and  400  and can be implemented with the pool cleaner  100  or the pool cleaner  700  when suitable, as understood by one of ordinary skill in the art. 
     As shown in  FIG. 62 , which is a partially exploded view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 , the hydrocylconic particle separator assembly  804  generally includes a canister body subassembly  842 , a fine debris subassembly  844 , a filter medium  846 , a cyclone block subassembly  848 , a removable impeller subassembly  850 , a beauty cap  852 , and a handle  854 . 
       FIG. 63  is and exploded view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  showing the various subassemblies exploded as well. The canister body subassembly  842  includes a canister body  856 , a large debris container  858  that defines the bottom of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  800 , a first gasket  860  positioned between the canister body  856  and the large debris container  858 , a second gasket  862  positioned about a central opening  864  in the large debris container  858  and between the large debris container  858  and a portion of the fine debris subassembly  844 , and a check valve  866 . The canister body  856  includes an inlet  868  that tangentially introduces fluid into the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  800 . Two sets of guide vanes  870  are provided on opposing sides of the canister body  856  exterior. Each set of guide vanes  870  forms a channel  872  therebetween that is used to properly position the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  800  when it is being mounted onto the pool cleaner body  802 . Specifically, each channel  872  is configured to receive a respective catches  838  of the pool cleaner body  802  such that when a user is placing the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  800  on the pool cleaner body  802 , the guide vanes  870  will direct the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  800  so that the catches  838  are inserted into the channels  872 . Thus, the sets of guide vanes  870  prevent the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  800  from being incorrectly mounted to the pool cleaner body  802 . 
     The canister body  856  further includes a locking assembly  874  that can be substantially similar to the locking assembly  448  shown in  FIG. 23 . The locking assembly  874  includes a snap plate  876  disposed on the canister body  856 , a slide  878  connected to the snap plate  876  and having a wedge  880 , a slide cover  882  that covers a snap spring  884  positioned between the slide  878  and the slide cover  882 , and screws  886  that secure the locking assembly  874  to the canister body  856 . The locking assembly  874  can interlock with a complementary extension  888  protruding from an upper portion  890  of the large debris container  858 . To disengage the locking assembly  874 , a user can pinch the slide  878  and the snap plate  876  causing the slide  878  to compress the snap spring  884 . By sliding the slide  878 , the wedge  880  engages the extension  888  forcing it away from the locking assembly  874  and thus disengaging the extension  888  from the locking assembly  874 . Upon release of the slide  878 , the snap spring  884  will push the slide  878  back into its original position. 
     The large debris container  858  includes a hinge  892  connected to a complementary hinge  894  (see  FIG. 61 ) at a bottom portion of the canister body  856 . The large debris container  858  can thereby pivot at the hinge  892  between an open and a closed position, and the locking assembly  874  can be used to lock the large debris container  858  relative to the canister body  856  to maintain the large debris container  858  in a closed position. 
     With additional reference to  FIGS. 64 and 65 , which are perspective and side view of the canister body  856 , the canister body  856  generally defines an inner chamber  896  and includes the intake or inlet  868 . The inlet  868  includes a face plate  898  defining an opening and an inner latching shoulder  902  for engaging the check valve  866  and securing the check valve  866  to the canister body  856 . The inlet  868  is positioned such that fluid is introduced tangentially into the inner chamber  896 . In particular, the inlet  868  includes a tangential outlet  904  and an intake channel  906  extending between the opening  900  and the tangential outlet  904  of the inlet  868 . The tangential intake of fluid through the intake channel  906  results in the generation of a first cyclonic flow within the inner chamber  896 . The canister body  856  defines a substantially cylindrical configuration with substantially similar top and bottom edges  908 ,  910  each defining an opening. The top edge  908  can include a plurality of bayonet-lock recesses  911  for securing the cyclone block subassembly  848  with the canister body  856 . 
     With additional reference to  FIG. 66 , which is a perspective view of the large debris container  858 , the large debris container  858  includes a central hub  912  surrounded by a dish  914  extending radially rom the central hub  912 . In some embodiments, the dish  914  can have an upwardly-curving shape such that the dish  914  catches any debris that falls into the dish  914  and forms a static area where falling debris can land. In some embodiments, the dish  914  can include a substantially planar bottom surface with upwardly angled side walls  915 . The dish  914  extends from the central hub  912  to an annular top portion  916 . A first annular recess  917  is formed between the annular top portion  916  and the upper portion  890  of the large debris container  858 . The first annular recess  917  is configured to receive the first gasket  860 , which is discussed in greater detail in connection with  FIG. 78E . The central hub  912  includes the central opening  864  through which a motor&#39;s rotor can extend to engage the impeller subassembly  850 . The central hub  912  also includes a second annular recess  918  surrounding the opening  864  that receives the second gasket  862 , which is discussed in greater detail in connection with  FIG. 78F . In some embodiments, the bottom surface of the large debris container  858  can include a honeycomb pattern of ribs  920 . The ribs  920  can reduce the overall weight of the large debris container  858  while providing structural support. The large debris container  858  can also include a first and second concave recesses  922   a ,  922   b  that accommodate elevated sections of the motor box  840  that may be due to motor placement. Additionally, the large debris container  858  can include a concave portion  924  configured and dimensioned to receive a locking interface  925  (see  FIG. 58 ) of the motor box  840  in order to properly place the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  on the cleaner body  802  and over an entertainment light lens of the motor box. The entire volume of the dish  914  can be disposed below the canister body  856 . 
     The fine debris subassembly  844  generally includes a fine debris container  926 , a fine debris container top  928 , a fine debris gasket  930 , and an annular gasket  978 , as shown in  FIG. 62 . The fine debris container  926 , fine debris container top  928 , and fine debris gasket  930  can be substantially similar in construction and function to fine debris container  434 , fine debris container top  432 , and the second gasket  424  of  FIGS. 33-37 . With additional reference to  FIGS. 67 and 68 , a top view of the fine debris subassembly  844  and a sectional view taken along line  68 - 68  of  FIG. 67  are provided. The fine debris container  926  includes a dish  932  with an outer perimeter  934  and an inner perimeter  936 , the surface of the dish  932  slopes downwardly towards a central vertical axis  938  where it connects with a central tubular extension  940  at the inner perimeter  936 . The tapered dish  932  assists in transferring fine debris from the dish  932  to the central tubular extension  940 . The central tubular extension  940  includes a central inner opening  942  formed at the inner perimeter  936 . The central inner opening  942  extends through the central tubular extension  940  to a distal end  944 . The central tubular extension  940  can be generally cylindrical in some aspects, while in other aspects it can be tapered from the central inner opening  942  to the distal end  944 , e.g., toward the central vertical axis  938 , such that the central inner opening  942  has a diameter that is greater than the diameter of the central outer opening  942 . The tapered radial wall of the central radial extension  526  assists in transfer of fine debris from the dish  516  to an area near the distal end  534  of the central radial extension  526 . 
     The dish  932  includes an inner surface  946  that includes a plurality of upwardly extending bulbs  948 . The bulbs  948  can be radially formed on the inner surface  946 . In some embodiments, the fine debris container  844  includes a first row of bulbs  948  radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  938  near the outer perimeter  934  of the dish  932 , and further includes a second row of bulbs  948  radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  938  near the inner perimeter  936  of the dish  932 . Each of the bulbs  948  near the outer perimeter  934  can define a first height relative to the inner surface  946 , and each of the bulbs  948  near the inner perimeter  936  can define a second height relative to the inner surface  946 , the first height being dimensioned smaller than the second height. Each of the bulbs  948  includes a radial wall  950 , a top surface  952  and an opening  954  formed in the top surface  952 . Each of the bulbs  948  further includes a cavity  956  formed within the radial wall  950  and connected with the opening  954 , the cavity  956  extending to an outer surface  958  of the dish  932 . 
     The fine debris container top  928  includes a top circular plate  960 , a substantially circular outer perimeter wall  962 , and a central opening  964  formed in the top circular plate  960 . The fine debris container top  928  includes a central tubular extension  966  protruding from an inner surface  968  of the top circular plate  960  and about the central opening  964 . The central tubular extension  966  includes an interior cavity  970  that connects with the central opening  964 . In some aspects, the wall that forms the central tubular extension  966  can taper gradually such that the thickness of the wall is greater near the inner surface  968  than the thickness of the radial wall at a distal end  972  of the central tubular extension  966 . 
     The outer perimeter wall  962  can extend downwardly from the top circular plate  960  spaced radially inward from an outer edge  974  of the top circular plate  960 . Placement of the outer perimeter wall  962  forms a mounting surface  976  at the outer edge  974  of the top circular plate  960 . A gasket  978  can be placed between the mounting surface  976  and the outer perimeter wall  962  of the fine debris container top  928 , and the outer perimeter  934  of the fine debris container  926  to form a watertight seal between the fine debris container  926  and the fine debris container top  928 . The top circular plate  960  includes a plurality of radially spaced openings  980  formed therein and circumferentially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  938 . In some embodiments, a first row of openings  980  can be radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  938  near the outer edge  974  of the top circular plate  960 , and a second row of openings  980  can be radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  938  closer to the central opening  964 . The openings  980  can be configured and dimensioned to receive the distal ends of a portion of the cyclone block subassembly  848 , discussed in greater detail below. 
     As shown in  FIG. 68 , the fine debris subassembly  844  additionally includes the fine debris gasket  930  which can be disposed over the fine debris container top  928 . The fine debris gasket  930  includes a gasket body  982  that can be substantially planar and disc-like in configuration. The gasket body  982  includes a central opening  984  and a plurality of radially spaced openings  986  that are configured to match in location to the openings  980  of the fine debris container top  928 . Particularly, in some embodiments, a first row of openings  986  can be radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  938  near an outer perimeter edge  988  of the gasket body  982 , and a second row of openings  986  can be radially disposed relative to the central vertical axis  938  closer to the central opening  984 . 
     When assembled, the central tubular extension  966  of the fine debris container top  928  can be positioned concentrically within the central tubular extension  940  of the fine debris container  926 . The distal end  972  of the central tubular extension  966  and the distal end  944  of the central radial extension  940  can be positioned against the second gasket  862  that is positioned at the central opening  864  of the large debris container  858  to create a water-tight seal therebetween. The fine debris container  926  can be secured with the fine debris container top by a plurality of screws or bolts that extend through the bulbs  948 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, fine debris filtered from the fluid flow during a second cyclonic filtering stage can be deposited in the cavity or chamber formed between the central tubular extensions  940 ,  966  and the second gasket  862 . 
     It should be understood that when the large debris container  858  is unlatched from the canister body  856  and is in the open position, large debris from the large debris container  858  and fine debris from the cavity or chamber formed between the central tubular extensions  940 ,  966  can be simultaneously emptied. In particular, opening the large debris container  858  releases the seal formed between the second gasket  862  and the distal ends  944 ,  972  of the central tubular extensions  940 ,  966 , allowing the fine debris to be simultaneously emptied from the canister body  856 . 
     The filter medium  846  can have a rigid substrate or can be generally a frustoconical shell that can be a mesh, filter, polymesh, or the like. While the filter medium  846  is shown as a solid component herein, this is simply done for ease of illustration, and it should be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art that the filter medium  846  includes a number of open spaces extending therethrough and is configured to allow water to flow across it. The filter medium  846  is mounted to the fine debris subassembly  844  and the cyclone block subassembly  848 , and extends about the perimeter of the fine debris subassembly  844  and the cyclone block subassembly  848 . Accordingly, fluid flowing from the exterior of the cyclone block subassembly  848  to the interior flows across the filter medium  846 . The filter medium  846  is sized such that debris of a first size, e.g., larger debris, cannot pass through the filtering medium  846 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, in a first cyclonic separation stage, the filter medium  846  can filter out a first debris size, e.g., large debris, from the fluid flow with the large debris dropping into the large debris container  858 . In particular, the large debris contacts the filter medium  846 , or the interior wall of the canister body  856 , and is knocked down out of the fluid flow and does not enter the interior of the filtering medium  846 . The fluid flow with at least some fine debris can continue through the filtering medium  846  and into the cyclone block subassembly  848 . The filter medium  846  can be single filter component mounted to the fine debris subassembly  844  and the cyclone block subassembly  848 , or it can be an assembly in accordance with the filtering assembly  426  discussed in connection with  FIGS. 23 and 24 . 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 63 , the cyclone block subassembly  848  includes a cyclone block  990 , a cyclone block gasket  992 , a vortex finder ring  994 , vortex finder ring gasket  996 , and a top cap  998 .  FIGS. 69 and 70  are, respectively, perspective and top views of the cyclone block  990 , while  FIG. 71  is a sectional view of the cyclone block  990  taken along line  71 - 71  of  FIG. 70 . The cyclone block  990  includes a cyclone block body  1000  in the form of a cylindrical disc with a central opening  1002  formed in the cyclone block body  1000 . The cyclone block body  1000  can include an outer ledge  1004  that overhangs a sidewall  1006 . The sidewall  1006  can include one or more grooves  1008  that are configured and sized to receive the cyclone block gasket  992  such that the cyclone block gasket  992  is compressed between the sidewall  1006  of the cyclone block body  1000  and the interior of a sidewall of the canister body  856  when the cyclone block subassembly  848  is connected to the canister body  856  (see  FIG. 78A , discussed below). In some embodiments, the cyclone block gasket  992  can have a U-shaped cross-section so that it is positioned in more than one groove  1008 . The cyclone block body  1000  also includes first and second handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  extending upwardly from the cyclone block body  1000  and positioned diametrically opposed to one another. The first and second handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  are configured to engage and secure the handle  854  to the cyclone block  990  and thus the cyclone block subassembly  848 . The cyclone block body  1000  also includes a plurality of individual cyclone containers  1012  radially disposed relative to a central vertical axis  1014 . In particular, the cyclone block  990  includes a first set of cyclone containers  1016  radially disposed around the central opening  1002  and a second set of cyclone containers  1018  radially disposed around the first set of cyclone containers  1016 . 
     Each of the cyclone containers  1012  of the first set of cyclone containers  1016  can extend substantially parallel to the central vertical axis  1014 . Each of the cyclone containers  1012  of the second set of cyclone containers  1018  can extend in an angled manner relative to the central vertical axis  1014  (e.g., angled with a bottom of the cyclone container  1018  in the direction of the central vertical axis  1014 ). In particular, a central axis A 1  of each of the cyclone containers  1012  of the first set of cyclone containers  1016  can be substantially parallel to the central vertical axis  1014 , while a central axis A 2  of each of the cyclone containers  1012  of the second set of cyclone containers  1018  can be angled relative to the central vertical axis  1014 . Further, a cylindrical top portion  1020  of each of the second set of cyclone containers  1018  can be disposed further from the central vertical axis  1014  than a debris underflow nozzle  1022 . 
     It should be understood that the description of a single cyclone container  1012  holds true for all of the cyclone containers  1012  that make up the first and second rings of cyclone containers  1016 ,  1018  (i.e., those included in the cyclone block  1000 ), unless noted otherwise. Each cyclone container  1012  includes a circular tapered container body  1024  that defines a cyclone chamber  1026  and includes an overflow opening  1028 , a debris underflow nozzle  1022 , and one or more tangential inlets  1030  generally positioned on a radially outward portion of each first set of cyclone containers  1016  and a radially inward portion of each second set of cyclone containers  1018 . Each cyclone container  1012  generally includes the cylindrical top portion  1020  and a frustoconical bottom portion  1032  that tapers downward to the debris underflow nozzle  1022 . The frustoconical bottom portion  1032  aids in maintaining a centrifugal acceleration of the fluid flow as the fluid travels downward along the interior of the frustoconical bottom portion  1032  in the direction of the debris underflow nozzle  1022 . In some embodiments, the tangential inlets  1030  of each cyclone container  1012  of the first set of cyclone containers  1016  can be in fluid communication with the tangential inlets  1030  of an adjacent cyclone container  1012  of the first set of cyclone containers  1016  via a passage  1034 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, fluid passing through the filter medium  846  enters the inner chamber  896  of the canister body  856  flows around the frustoconical bottom portions  1032  of the cyclone containers  1012  and travels upward into the respective tangential inlets  1030  of the cyclone containers  1012 . Therefore, fluid enters each of the cyclone chambers  1026  of the first and second set of cyclone containers  1016 ,  1018  substantially simultaneously and forms individual cyclones within the cyclone containers  1012 . A concentric, dual-cyclone configuration within the cyclone block  990  is thereby formed. 
     Each of the frustoconical bottom portions  1032  can be configured and dimensioned to be partially received within the radially spaced openings  980 ,  986  of the fine debris container top  928  and the fine debris gasket  930  such that fine debris filtered by the cyclone containers  1012  falls through the debris underflow nozzle  1022  and into the fine debris container  926 . Thus, the fine debris container top  928  maintains the debris underflow nozzles  1022  suspended over or spaced from the dish  932  of the fine debris container  928 . Accordingly, debris falls out of the debris-laden water within each individual cyclone container  1012 , e.g., due to contact with the wall of the cyclone container body  1024 , and falls through the debris underflow nozzle  1022  and into the fine debris container  926 . When assembled, as shown in  FIG. 78A  (discussed in greater detail below), the frustoconical bottom portions  1032  of the cyclone containers  1012  are positioned within and surrounded by the filter medium  846 . Thus, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  includes a dual cyclone system with the first cyclone occurring between the canister body  856  and the filter medium  846 , and the second cyclones occurring in each of the cyclone containers  1012 . 
     The cyclone block  990  additionally includes a plurality of bayonet-lock protrusions  1036  extending radially from the sidewall  1006 . The bayonet-lock protrusions  1036  can be inserted into and twisted into engagement with the bayonet-lock recesses  911  of the canister body  856  in order to secure the cyclone block  990  to the canister body  856 . 
     As referenced above, the cyclone block subassembly  848  includes a vortex finder ring  994  and a vortex finder ring gasket  996 . The vortex finder ring  994  can be substantially similar in construction to the ring  410  illustrated in  FIGS. 42 and 43  and described above. Additionally, the vortex finder ring gasket  996  can be substantially similar in construction to the vortex finder gasket  678  illustrated in  FIG. 44  and described above. Specifically, the vortex finder ring  994  includes a ring body  1038  with a central portion  1040  with a polygonal perimeter  1042 , and a plurality of perimeter flaps  1044  extending from the polygonal perimeter  1042 . The central portion  1040  can be recessed relative to the perimeter flaps  1044 , with respective angled wall sections  1046  connecting the central portion  1040  to the perimeter flaps  1044 . 
     The ring body  1038  includes a central opening  1048 , a first set of vortex finders  1050  radially disposed around the central opening  1048 , and a second set of vortex finders  1052  radially disposed around the first set of vortex finders  1050 . Each of the first set of vortex finders  1050  can extend substantially parallel to a central vertical axis. Each of the second set of vortex finders  1052  can be angled relative to the central vertical axis. In particular, the angle of the second set of vortex finders  1052  can be substantially equal to the angle of the cyclone containers  1012  of the second set of cyclone containers  1018 . In some embodiments, the perimeter flaps  1044  can be hingedly connected to the angled wall sections  1046  such that the angle of each vortex finder  1052  can be individually adjusted relative to the central vertical axis. During assembly, the first set of vortex finders  1050  can be positioned at least partially into the cyclone containers  1012  of the first set of cyclone containers  1016 , and the second set of vortex finders  1052  can be positioned at least partially into the cyclone containers  1012  of the second set of cyclone containers  1018 . 
     Each of the vortex finders  1050 ,  1052  includes a cylindrical extension  1054 , with the cylindrical extensions  1054  of the first set of vortex finders  1050  protruding downwardly from the central portion  1040  of the ring body  1038  and the cylindrical extensions  1054  of the second set of vortex finders  1052  protruding downwardly from the respective perimeter flap  1044 . Each cylindrical extension  1054  includes a uniform channel  1056  passing therethrough. When the cylindrical extensions  1054  are positioned within the respective cyclone containers  1012 , the vortex finders  1050 ,  1052  assist in generating a vortex within the cyclone containers  1012  such that debris of a second size (e.g., fine debris) hits the inner walls of the cyclone container  1012  and travels downwardly through the frustoconical bottom portion  1032 , through the debris underflow nozzle  1022  and into the fine debris container  926 . 
     The vortex finder gasket  996  can be substantially disc-shaped and includes a gasket body  1058 . The gasket body  1058  includes a central opening  1060 , a first set of openings  1062  radially disposed around the central opening  1060 , and a second set of openings  1064  radially disposed around the first set of openings  1062 . The positions of the first and second set of openings  1062 ,  1064  can correspond to the vortex finders  1050 ,  1052  of the vortex finder ring  994 . During assembly, the respective vortex finders  1050 ,  1052  can be inserted through the openings  1062 ,  1064  such that the vortex finder gasket  996  is disposed against the bottom surface of the ring body  1038 . The gasket body  1058  includes a plurality of curved protrusions  1066  adjacent to the second set of openings  1064  that substantially match the configuration of the perimeter flaps  1044  of the vortex finder ring  994 . The curved protrusions  1066  define the perimeter edge of the vortex finder gasket  996 . 
     The top cap  998  includes a top plate  1068  with a plurality of holes  1069  and rounded lobes  1070  extending from the perimeter of the top plate  1068 , and an outlet  1072  at the center of the top plate  1068 . The number of rounded lobes  1070  can equal the number of cyclone containers  1012  in the second set of cyclone containers  1018  and the number of vortex finders in the second set of vortex finders  1052 . Each of the rounded lobes  1070  extends to the top plate  1068  and converge at a central cavity  1074  (see  FIGS. 78A and 78C ) within the top cap  998 . The cavity  1074  is in fluidic communication with the outlet  1072  of the top cap  998 . A guard  1076  (which can be a diffuser) of the impeller subassembly  850  can be positioned over the outlet  1072  and secured to the top plate  1068  of the top cap  998  to promote suction of fluid out of the cavity  1074 . The top cap  998  can also include a plurality of bypass holes  1075  that extend through the top cap  998  and place the central cavity  1074  of the top cap  998  in fluidic communication with the exterior. The bypass holes  1075  allow for additional flow and therefore additional thrust if the filter medium  846  were to become clogged during a cleaning cycle, thus allowing the cleaner  800  to remain fully functional even if the filter medium  846  was clogged. For example, this allows the cleaner  800  to maintain suction, maintain/increase efficiency, reduce strain on the pump motor, and/or maintain operation. Additionally, the flow through the bypass holes  1075  reduces the overall hydraulic resistance through the cleaner  800  even when the filter medium  846  is clean and unclogged. Thus, the bypass holes  1075  provide for an additional flow through the cleaner  800  when the filter medium  846  is in both a clean and a dirty state. By increasing the flow rate, the pump motor that drives the impeller subassembly  850  does not need to be operated at full power at all times in order for the cleaner  800  to be effective. Instead, the pump motor can be operated at a lower power, but still maintain the required flow/downward force/thrust to effectively clean and climb pool walls, thus extending the operational range of the pump motor. As a result, the pump can be operated in a more efficient operation range, a reduced power consumption, and a with a reduced load on the power supply. This allows, among other things, the cleaner  800  to be effective at climbing a pool wall when in full cycle mode for an extended period of time. Additionally, the changes in pump motor current can be monitored to determine when the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  is sufficiently loaded, and used to signal to a user that the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  is full and needs to be emptied of debris. The cleaner  800  can also be operated in a “boost” mode whereby the pump motor is increased to full power, thus providing additional thrust, which can be used for maneuvering the cleaner  800  when it is stuck or upside down and unable to right itself. The bypass holes  1075  are generally located at a rear portion of the top cap  998  to prevent inflow of air when the pool cleaner  800  breaches a water line. For example, as the pool cleaner  800  climbs a pool wall it may breach the waterline, which would result in the inflow of air if the bypass holes  1075  were also to breach the waterline, e.g., if they were placed on the front of the top cap  998 . If air were to be drawn into the cleaner  800  the pumping action through the cleaner  800  could lose prime, resulting in the pool cleaner  800  peeling off the pool wall, becoming unstable, becoming unpredictable, breaking from the cleaning path, or generally giving the impression of a non-intelligent or defective device. 
     When assembled, the top cap  998  is positioned over all of the vortex finders  1050 ,  1052  and the cyclone containers  1018  such that fluid can exit the cyclone containers  1018  through the respective vortex finder  1050 ,  1052 , travel into the cavity  1074 , out of the outlet  1072 , and through the guard  1076 . Thus, individual fluid cyclonic flows within the cyclone block  990  can merge within the cavity  1074  prior to being expelled from the outlet  1072 . The top cap  998  can be secured to the guard  1076 , which in turn can be secured to the cyclone block  990  by a plurality of screws or bolts. 
     As illustrated in  FIG. 63 , the impeller subassembly  850  includes shaft  1078 , a sleeve  1080 , an impeller  1082 , first and second ball bearings  1084 ,  1086 , a retention ring  1088 , and the guard  1076 .  FIGS. 72 and 73  are, respectively, perspective and top views of the impeller subassembly  850 , while  FIG. 74  is a sectional view of the impeller subassembly  850  taken along line  74 - 74  of  FIG. 73 . The shaft  1078  includes a body  1090 , a proximal end  1092  at a first end of the body  1090 , and a distal end  1094  at an opposite second end of the body  1090 . The proximal end  1092  can include a tip  1096  configured to mate with a complementary opening  1098  of the impeller  1082 . Thus, rotation of the shaft  1078  simultaneously drives rotation of the impeller  1082 . The tip  1096  allows the impeller  1082  to be removably attached to the shaft  1078  by any suitable fastener, e.g., a screw  1100 . The distal end  1094  includes a female member  1102  that defines a keyed inner chamber  1104  configured to mate with a male member of a pump motor (e.g., a spline coupling, a lovejoy connector, or the like). The pump motor can thereby rotationally drive the shaft  1078  and thus the impeller  1082  through the female member  1102 . The body  1090  of the shaft  1078  also includes first and second expanded sections  1104 ,  1106  that have a large diameter than the body  1090  and are configured to engage the first and second ball bearings  1084 ,  1086 , respectively. 
     The sleeve  1080  includes a tubular body  1108  having a first end  1110  and a second end  1112 , and a mounting plate  1114  extending radially from the first end  1110  of the tubular body  1108 . The tubular body  1108  is generally hollow and defines an inner cavity  1116 . The interior of the tubular body  1108  includes a lower shoulder  1118  and an upper shoulder  1120 . The first and second ball bearings  1084 ,  1086  can be plastic ball bearings and are positioned within the inner cavity  1116  of the tubular body  1108  with the first ball bearing  1084  seated against the lower shoulder  1118  and the second ball bearing  1086  seating against the upper shoulder  1120 . The lower and upper shoulders  1118 ,  1120  prevent the ball bearings  1084 ,  1086  from unwanted axial movement. Alternatively, the impeller subassembly  850  can include a single ball bearing. The mounting plate  1114  includes three radially spaced hollow mounting bosses  1122 . The mounting bosses  1122  are configured to engage mounting protrusions  1124  of the guard  1076 . 
     The guard  1076  includes a shroud  1126  and an annular flange  1128  extending radially from the shroud  1126 . The plurality of mounting protrusion  1124  extend perpendicularly from the annular flange  1128  and are spaced and configured to engage the mounting bosses  1122  of the sleeve  1080 , thus securing the guard  1076  and the sleeve  1080  together. The shroud  1126  generally defines an inner chamber  1030  that has a bottom opening  1132  (e.g., at the center of the annular flange  1128 ) and a top opening  1134  that are in fluidic communication. When the impeller subassembly  850  is fully assembled, the impeller  1082  is positioned within the inner chamber  1030  of the guard  1076 . The top opening  1134  of the guard  1076  also includes a plurality of ribs  1136  and a central hub  1138  that prevent a user from inserting their fingers into the guard  1076  during operation. The ribs  1136  can be radial fins or guards, annular fins or guards, embossments, a screen, a mesh, etc. The guard  1076  also includes a plurality of holes  1140  in the annular flange  1128 . A standard fastener, e.g., bolt or screw, can be inserted through the holes  1140  of the guard  1076  and the holes  1069  of the top cap  998  to secure the guard  1076  to the top cap  998  during installation. 
     Notably, the example impeller subassembly  850  is a singular unit that contains very few components and can be removed and replaced without disassembling the entire hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . As shown in  FIG. 74 , when the impeller subassembly  850  is fully constructed, the impeller  1082  is radially spaced from the interior walls of the diffuser&#39;s  1076  shroud  1126  as well as axially spaced from the ribs  1136  of the guard  1076 . This spacing can be, for example, 0.030 inches, which allows for the impeller subassembly  850  to maintain a clearance without the likelihood of interference. The reduced number of components that make up the impeller subassembly  850 , e.g., the “stack-up” of the assembly, along with this spacing, decreases the likelihood of interference. In some embodiments, by lowering the number of components contributing to “stack-up,” a manufacturing defect rate can be lowered and any variance between units can be more reliably accounted for. 
     To install the impeller subassembly  850 , a user would take the fully assembled impeller assembly and insert the sleeve  1080  through the outlet  1072  of the top cap  998 , the central opening  1048  of the vortex finder ring  994 , the central opening  1060  of the vortex finder gasket  996 , the central opening  1002  of the cyclone block  990 , the central opening  984  of the fine debris gasket  930 , the central opening  964  of the fine debris container top  928 , and the central opening  864  of the large debris container  858 . The user would then align the holes  1140  of the guard  1076  with holes  1069  of the top cap  998  and insert a fastener, e.g., a screw or a bolt, through the holes  1140 ,  1069  to secure the diffuser  1078  to the top cap  998  and thus securing the impeller subassembly  850  to the cyclone block subassembly  848 . When the impeller subassembly  850  is engaged with the cyclone block subassembly  848 , the mounting plate  1114  of the sleeve  1080  rests against and engages the central portion  1040  of the vortex finder ring  994 . Furthermore, when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is placed on a cleaner body  802 , a male member of the pump motor can pass through the second end  1112  of the sleeve  1080  to engage the female member  1102  to rotate the shaft  1078  and thus the impeller  1082  within the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . 
     Additionally, the second end  1112  of the sleeve  1080  can also function as the initial impact/engagement point with the pump motor which can have a tapered edge itself. That is, when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is positioned on a cleaner body  802 , the second end  1112  of the sleeve  1080  can engage the tapered edge of the pump motor prior to the male member of the drive motor engaging the female member  1102  of the shaft  1078  in order to center the shaft  1078  of the pump motor male member before being locked into place, which maintains the shaft  1078  and pump motor male member in alignment without using the shaft  1078  itself for the alignment. Thus, in some embodiments, the sleeve  1080  can absorb any shock or loading forces from installation of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 , e.g., if it were to be dropped or misaligned by a user during installation. This eliminates force loading of the shaft  1078  that would have been subsequently transferred to the bearings  1084 ,  1086  and potentially caused them to prematurely fail. Furthermore, the shaft  1078  of the impeller subassembly  850  is capable of sliding along its central axis within the bearings  1084 ,  1086  and the sleeve  1080  when it is installed. For example, if the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  were to be dropped onto the pool cleaner body  802  during installation, the pump motor male member may forcefully contact the female member  1102  of the shaft  1078 , causing the shaft  1078  to slide toward the first end  1110  of the sleeve  1080 . By configuring the impeller subassembly  850  in such a way that the shaft  1078  can slide axially, the shaft  1078  and the impeller  1082  will transfer the force to the bottom of the guard  1076  and together are capable of absorbing a portion of the force instead of transferring the force to the bearings  1084 ,  1086 , which if done could cause the bearings  1084 ,  1086  to prematurely fail. The retention ring  1088  prevents the shaft  1078  from sliding too far in the direction toward the second end  1112  of the sleeve  1080 . Additionally and/or alternatively, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  or the pool cleaner body  802  can be equipped with leaf springs, dampeners, or skid plates to control the rate of insertion of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  on to the pool cleaner body  802 . 
     The beauty cap  852  is a removable skin that allows a user to customize their pool cleaner  800 , and specifically their hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 , as well as provide additional functionality. The beauty cap  852  includes a body  1142  with a plurality of rounded lobes  1144  extending about the perimeter of the body  1142  and a top opening  1146 . The shape and configuration of the body  1142  and rounded lobes  1144  of the beauty cap  852  are in substantial alignment with the shape and configuration of the rounded lobes  1070  and top plate  1068  of the top cap  998 . Particularly, the beauty cap  852  is placed over the guard  1076  and the top cap  998  and secured to the top cap  998  with the guard  1076  extending through the top opening  1146 . The beauty cap  852  can additionally include notches  1148  for engaging a portion of the handle  854 , which is discussed in greater detail below. Additionally, the beauty cap  852  includes channels  1150  that allow water to flow to the interior and provide water to the bypass holes  1075  of the top cap  998 . 
       FIGS. 75A and 7B  are perspective and front views of the handle  854 , respectively. The handle  854  includes a curved body  1152 , a first locking hook  1154 , and a second locking hook  1156 . The body  1152  includes a user-engageable frame  1158  extending between a first end  1160  and a second end  1162 . The first and second ends  1158 ,  1160  each include a respective mounting boss  1164 ,  1166  that extends inwardly from the frame  1158 . The mounting bosses  1164 ,  1166  are sized and configured to engage the handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  of the cyclone block  990  in order to secure the handle  854  to the cyclone block  990 .  FIG. 76  is a bottom perspective view of the mounting boss  1166 . It should be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art the a description of mounting boss  1166  holds true for the other mounting boss  1166  and that the mounting bosses  1166  are substantially identical in construction. As shown in  FIG. 76 , the mounting boss  1166  is generally tubular in shape and defines an interior cavity  1168  that is sized and configured to receive a portion of the handle engagement tab  1010   b  of the cyclone block  990  (see  FIG. 69 ) such that the mounting boss  1166  can rotate about the handle engagement tab  1010   b . The mounting boss  1166  additional includes a channel  1170  that extends partially around the perimeter of the mounting boss  1166 . The channel  1170  is configured to receive a portion of the handle engagement tab  1010   b  in order to prevent the handle  854  from pulling away from the cyclone block  990  when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is carried by the handle  854 . Engagement of these components is discussed in greater detail in connection with  FIG. 81 . Additionally, the interior cavity  1168  includes a protrusion  1171  that is configured to engage the handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b . Specifically,  FIG. 77  is an enlarged view of the handle engagement tab  1010   a  of Area  77  of  FIG. 69 . As illustrated in  FIG. 77 , the handle engagement tab  1010   a  includes a first detent  1173 , an angled protrusion  1175 , and a second detent  1177 . The protrusion  1171  is configured to be seated in the first detent  1173  when the handle  854  is in a “down” position. When the protrusion  1171  is seated in the first detent  1173 , the handle  854  is prevented from inadvertently rotating into an “up” position. For example, when the pool cleaner  800  is in water, the handle  854  may have a tendency to rise due to buoyant forces and rotate into the “up” position. This is prevented by the protrusion  1171  being seated in the first detent  1173  and through engagement of the protrusion  1171  with the angled protrusion  1175 . However, a user can rotate the handle  854  into the “up” position causing the protrusion  1171  to traverse the first detent  1173  and engage the angled protrusion  1175 . As the user continues to rotate the handle  854  into the “up” position, the protrusion  1171  will further engage the angled protrusion  1175 , causing the mounting bosses  1164 ,  1166  to be pushed outward. Continued rotation of the handle  854  will cause the protrusion  1171  to overcome and be forced past the angled protrusion  1175  and into the second detent  1177  where it will be seated. When the protrusion  1171  is seated in the second detent  1177 , the handle  854  is maintained in an “up” position and prevented from inadvertently falling into the “down” position from the “up” position. For example, when the handle  854  is secured in the “up” position a user can place the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  on the ground and the handle  854  will stay in the “up” position. It should be understood that the above description holds true for both handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b.    
     The frame  1158  also includes a plurality of locking tabs  1172  on an interior portion thereof. The locking tabs  1172  are sized and configured to releasably engage the notches  1148  of the beauty cap  852  in order to lock the handle  854  in a closed position. The first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  extend generally perpendicularly and downward from the first and second ends  1160 ,  1162  of the frame  1158 , respectively. The first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  are generally elongate structures that each include a recess  1174 ,  1176  at the end that forms an engagement surface  1178 ,  1180 . Each recess  1174 ,  1176  of the first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  is configured to receive one of the catches  838  of the pool cleaner body  802  in order to interconnect the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  with the pool cleaner body  802 . Interaction of the first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  with the structural locking hooks  868  is discussed in greater detail in connection with  FIG. 79 . 
     When the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is fully assembled and attached to the pool cleaner body  802 , a plurality of different chambers and flow paths are formed.  FIGS. 78A-78F  are sectional views of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 .  FIG. 78A  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  taken along line  78 A- 78 A of  FIG. 60  showing, among other things, reference numbers for the chambers and flow paths within the pool cleaner.  FIG. 78B  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  taken along line  78 B- 78 B of  FIG. 61  showing various elements of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . 
     A first chamber C 1  is generally formed at the interior of the canister body  856  and as a portion of the inner chamber  896  of the canister body  856 . The first chamber C 1  is generally delineated as being between the inside of the canister body  856 , the outside of the filter medium  846 , and the outside of the fine debris container  926 . The first chamber C 1  receives debris-laden water having large and small debris contained therein. Flow of the debris-laden water within the first chamber C 1  is discussed in greater detail below. A second chamber C 2  is generally formed at the interior of the large debris container  858 . The second chamber C 2  receives and retains large debris filtered from the water. The third chamber C 3  is generally formed between the outer surfaces of the cyclone containers  1012  of the cyclone block  990 , and is generally delineated as being between the inside of the filter medium  846 , the outer surfaces of the cyclone containers  1012 , the ring body  1038  of the vortex finder ring  994 , and the fine debris container top  928 . The third chamber C 3  receives once-filtered debris-laden water from the first chamber C 1 , e.g., water that has small debris contained therein with the large debris filtered out and retained in the second chamber C 2 . 
     Fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  are generally formed within each of the cyclone containers  1012  of the first and second set of cyclone containers  1016 ,  1018 . In particular, the fourth chamber C 4  is formed within the cyclone containers  1012  of the second set of cyclone containers  1016  and the fifth chamber C 5  is formed within the cyclone containers  1012  of the first set of cyclone containers  1018 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, once-filtered debris-laden water can enter the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  substantially simultaneously. The fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  are generally delineated as being within the cyclone chambers  1026  of the cyclone containers  1012  between the interior of a cyclone container  1012  and a vortex finder of the first and second sets of vortex finders  1050 ,  1052 . The fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5  receive the once-filtered debris-laden water from the third chamber C 3 . 
     A sixth chamber C 6  is generally formed at the interior of the fine debris container  926 , and is generally delineated as being between the central tubular extension  940  of the fine debris container  926 , the central tubular extension  966  of the fine debris container top  928 , and the second gasket  862 . The sixth chamber C 6  is a static flow area that receives small debris that is separated out from the once-filtered debris-laden water that passes through the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5 . The once-filtered debris-laden water is filtered a second time in the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5 , where small debris “falls out” from the water and passes through the debris underflow nozzles  1022  of each respective individual cyclone container  1012  and into the sixth chamber C 6 . 
     The seventh chamber C 7  extends from the uniform channel  1056  of each cylindrical extension  1054  of the first and second sets of vortex finders  1050 ,  1052  to the to opening  1134  of the guard  1076 . The seventh chamber C 7  is generally delineated by the interior of the plurality of cylindrical extensions  1054  of the first and second sets of vortex finders  1050 ,  1052 , the interior chamber of each rounded lobe  1070 , the ring body  1038 , the mounting plate  1114  of the sleeve  1080 , and the guard  1076 . Accordingly, the seventh chamber C 7  is a lobed chamber that originates at the channel  1056  of each cylindrical extension  1054  and extends to the opening  1134  of the guard  1076 , with the impeller  1082 , ribs  1136 , and central hub  1138  being positioned in the seventh chamber C 7 . The seventh chamber C 7  receives the twice-filtered water, e.g., water having minimal debris therein, from the fourth and fifth chambers C 4 , C 5 , and expels the filtered water from the opening  1134 . 
     Turning now to a description of the flow paths through the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 ,  FIG. 78A  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  that illustrates the flow paths therethrough. Although not shown in  FIG. 78A , it should be understood that the flow path within the inlet bottom  822  of the pool cleaner  800  leading to the hydrocyclonic particle separator  804  is substantially similar to the flow paths shown in  FIG. 10C . Thus, a first flow path F 1  extends from the inlet bottom  822 , out of the inlet top  816 , into the inlet  868  of the canister body  856 , across the canister intake channel  906 , and out of the tangential outlet  904  where the fluid enters the canister body  856 . Water flowing through the first flow path F 1  is unfiltered water that is laden with large and small debris D L , D S . 
     The second flow path F 2  starts at the end of the first flow path F 1 , e.g., at the tangential outlet  904 , entering the cyclone chamber  1026  of the canister body  856  at the tangential outlet  904 . The second flow path F 2  enters the cyclone chamber  1026  at a tangent to the canister body  856 , the cyclone chamber  1026 , and the first chamber C 1  and is directed to flow between the inner wall of the canister body  856  and the filter medium  846 . The tangential entrance of the second flow path F 2  results in the generation of a cyclonic/rotational flow within the first chamber C 1  that circles about a central axis A 2  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . The cyclonic flow of the second flow path F 2  within the first chamber C 1  results in large debris particles D L , e.g., debris having an aggregate size (e.g., each dimension) of up to about 1.25 inches, for example, such as, sticks, leaves, grass, coarse sand, fine sand, stones, pebbles, insects, small animals, etc., striking the interior surface of the canister body  856  and the filter medium  846  and losing velocity, resulting in the large debris particles D L  falling to the bottom of the canister body  856  and into the large debris container  858  (e.g., the second chamber C 2 ) where they are collected and stored until the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  904  is removed from the pool cleaner and emptied. 
     A third flow path F 3  extends radially inward from the second flow path F 2 , flowing across the filter medium  846  into the third chamber C 3 . Fluid and smaller debris D S  are contained in the third flow path F 3 , but the larger debris D L  has been separated out. Accordingly, the fluid in the third flow path F 3  is once-filtered fluid. The third flow path F 3  enters the third chamber C 3  around the outer surface of the frustoconical bottom portions  1032  of the cyclone containers  1012  and rises upward in the direction of the cylindrical top portions  1020  of the cyclone containers  1012 . As the fluid of the third flow path F 3  reaches the tangential inlet  1030  of each of the cyclone containers  1012 , the third flow path F 3  connects with fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5 . In particular, the third flow path F 3  enters each of the cyclone containers  1012  of the first and second set of cyclone containers  1016 ,  1018  substantially simultaneously as fluid rises to the level of the tangential inlets  1030 . 
     The fourth flow path F 4  enters each individual cyclone container  1012  of the second set of cyclone containers  1018  at the respective tangential inlet  1030  where it proceeds to the respective cyclone chamber  1026 , e.g., the fourth chamber C 4 . Substantially simultaneously to the fourth flow path F 4  entering the cyclone containers  1012  of the second set of cyclone containers  1018 , the fifth flow path F 5  enters each individual cyclone container  1012  of the first set of cyclone containers  1016  at the respective tangential inlet  1030  where it proceeds to the respective cyclone chamber  1026 , e.g., the fifth chamber C 5 . The placement of the individual cyclone container&#39;s tangential inlet  1030 , e.g., at a tangent to the respective cyclone chamber  1026 , results in the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  being a cyclonic/rotational flow within each cyclone chamber  1026 . The fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  rotate within each individual cyclone container  1012  of the respective second and first set of cyclone containers  1016 ,  1018  to separate smaller debris D S , e.g., debris having an aggregate size (e.g., each dimension) of up to about 0.080 inches, for example, such as, coarse sand, fine sand, silt, dirt, insects, etc., based on the ratio of the smaller debris&#39; D S  centripetal force to fluid resistance from the fluid stream of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5 . More specifically, the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  travel along the interior wall of the respective cyclone container  1012 , travels downward along the cyclone container  1012  through the frustoconical bottom portion  1032  where the cyclone container  1012  tapers, and toward the debris underflow nozzle  1022 . 
     As the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  travel along the frustoconical bottom portion  1032 , the rotational radius of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  is reduced. As the rotational radius of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  is reduced, the larger and denser particles of the smaller debris particles D S  within the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  have too much inertia to follow the continually reducing rotational radius of the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  causing the smaller debris particles D S  to contact the inner surface of the cyclone container  1012  and fall to the bottom where the small debris particles D S  fall through the respective debris underflow nozzles  1022  and onto the tapered fine debris container  926 . The tapered configuration of the fine debris container  926  causes the small debris particles D S  to slide downward and into the sixth chamber C 6  where the small debris particles D S  are collected and stored by the fine debris container  926  until the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is removed from the pool cleaner and emptied. Thus, the small debris particles D S  separated from the water in both the first and second set of cyclone containers  1016 ,  1018  is collected in the same fine debris container  926  until the pool cleaner is emptied. 
     The result of the above description is that smaller and smaller debris is separated from the fluid flowing in the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  as these flow paths proceed down the frustoconical bottom portions  1032  of the respective cyclone containers  1012  forming an inner vortex. Additionally, as the fluid within the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  reaches the bottom of the frustoconical bottom portions  1032  and the inner vortex, it slows down and the rotation of the vortex flow is reversed, e.g., from a counter-clockwise flow on the outside to a clockwise flow on the inside, causing the fluid therein to be pulled upward (e.g., in a clockwise flow) through the respective cylindrical extensions  1054  of the first and second sets of vortex finders  1050 ,  1052  as twice-filtered fluid. The twice-filtered fluid enters the seventh chamber C 7  where it merges with the sixth flow path F 6 . 
     The sixth flow path F 6  connects with the fourth and fifth flow paths F 4 , F 5  at the top of the channel  1056  of each vortex finder cylindrical extension  1054  where twice-filtered water enters the seventh chamber C 7 . The sixth flow path F 6  extends from the channel  1056  of each cylindrical extension  1054 , across each rounded lobe  1070  of the top cap  998 , and through the guard  1076  to exit the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . That is, the sixth flow path F 6  completely traverses the seventh chamber C 7 . 
     Accordingly, the larger cyclonic/rotational flow travels about the central axis A 3 , while the smaller cyclonic/rotational flows are formed and flow about the secondary central axes of the individual cyclone containers  1012  of the cyclone block  990 , resulting in a plurality of smaller cyclonic/rotational flows within a larger cyclonic/rotational flow. In particular, the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  includes three levels of cyclonic/rotational flow—around the filter medium  846 , within the second set of cyclone containers  1016 , and within the first set of cyclone containers  1018 . 
     As such, debris-laden fluid flowing through the pool cleaner is filtered twice by particle separation due to the generated cyclones. Utilizing the cyclonic flows within the pool cleaner to separate the particles and drop the particles out of the flow path results in the retention of suction performance throughout the cleaner, as, in preferred embodiments, there is minimized opportunity (if any) for the smaller debris particles to clog the filtering elements. This allows for optimum fluid flow performance through entire cleaning cycles, longer cleaner run times between debris removal, and the collection of more debris before needing to empty the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . As is known in the art, the outward flow of clean fluid results in an opposing force, which, as is also known in the art, can be relied upon in navigation of the pool cleaner for the purpose of forcing a pool cleaner downward against the floor when the pool cleaner is traversing the floor and sideways against a wall, when the pool cleaner is traversing a wall of the pool. 
       FIG. 78C  is a sectional view of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  taken along line  78 C- 78 C of  FIG. 60 , showing the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  closed. As shown in  FIG. 78C  large debris D L  is collected in the large debris container  858  while small debris D S  is collected in the fine debris container  926  in the sixth chamber C 6 , as described above. Particularly, small debris D S  is collected between the central tubular extension  940  of the fine debris container  926 , the central tubular extension  966  of the fine debris container top  928 , and the second gasket  862 .  FIG. 78D  is a sectional view of the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  of  FIG. 78C  with the large debris container  858  in an open position. When in the open position, the extension  888  of the large debris container  858  has been disengaged from the locking assembly  874  thus causing the large debris container  858  to rotate about the hinge  892 . When in the open position, the large debris D L  can fall out from the large debris container  858 , and the small debris D S  can fall out from the sixth chamber C 6 , as illustrated. 
       FIG. 78E  is an enlarged view of Area  78 E identified in  FIG. 78A  and showing engagement of the first gasket  860  with the canister body  856  and the large debris container  858  when the canister body  856  and the large debris container  858  are engaged, e.g., when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is in a closed configuration. The first gasket  860  separates the perimeter of the bottom edge opening  910  of the canister body  856  from the annular top portion  916  and upper portion  890  of the large debris container  858 . The first gasket  860  defines a cross-section that includes a radial body  1182 , a bottom toothed portion  1184  extending downwardly from the radial body  1182 , a vertical extension  1186  extending upwardly from the radial body  1182 , and first and second curved extensions  1188 ,  1190  that curve radially outward and downward from the vertical extension  1186  toward the radial body  1182 . The bottom toothed portion  1184  of the first gasket  860  is positioned within the first annular recess  917  and secured therein by a friction fit and the engagement of teeth  1192  thereof with the walls defining the first annular recess  917 , thereby ensuring continued attachment of the first gasket  860  relative to the large debris container  858 . When the bottom toothed portion  1184  is engaged with the first annular recess  917 , the radial body  1182  is generally seated on the upper portion  890  of the large debris container  858  and the vertical extension  1186  is in contact and flush with the annular top portion  916  of the large debris container  858 . As shown in  FIG. 78E , when the canister body  856  is closed with the large debris container  858  an inner angled wall  1194  adjacent the bottom edge  910  of the canister body  856  engages and seals with the first and second curved extensions  1188 ,  1190 . Additionally, the first and second curved extensions  1188 ,  1190  can include a radius of curvature that is complementary to the inner angled wall  1194 . This configuration allows the first gasket  860  to maintain a seal between the canister body  856  and the large debris container  858  despite there being vacuum pressure within the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  that pulls on the first gasket  860 . Accordingly, the first gasket  860  functions as both a pressure gasket and a vacuum gasket. 
     Regarding the second gasket  862 ,  FIG. 78F  is an enlarged view of Area  78 F identified in  FIG. 78A  and shows the engagement of the second gasket  862  with the large debris container  858 , the central tubular extension  940  of the fine debris container  926 , and the central tubular extension  966  of the fine debris container top  928 . The second gasket  862  defines a cross-section that includes an annular body  1196 , a bottom toothed portion  1198  extending downwardly from the annular body  1196 , first and second inwardly extending radial extensions  2000 ,  2002  extending radially from the annular body  1196 , first and second outwardly extending radial extensions  2004 ,  2006  extending radially from the annular body  1196 , a first curved extension  2008  that curves radially inward and downward from the annular body  1196 , and a second curved extension  2010  that curves radially outward and downward from the annular body  1196 . The bottom toothed portion  1198  of the second gasket  862  is positioned within the second annular recess  918  of the central hub  912  and secured therein by a friction fit and the engagement of teeth  2012  thereof with the walls defining the second annular recess  918 , thereby ensuring continued attachment of the second gasket  862  relative to the central hub  912  of the large debris container  858 . When the bottom toothed portion  1198  is engaged with the second annular recess  918 , the first inwardly extending radial extension  2000  and the first outwardly extending radial extension  2004  are generally seated on shoulders  2014 ,  2016  of the central hub  912 . As shown in  FIG. 78F , when the canister body  856  is closed with the large debris container  858 , the central tubular extension  940  of the fine debris container  926  and the central tubular extension  966  of the fine debris container top  928  engages and creates a water-tight seal with the second inwardly extending radial extension  2002 , the second outwardly extending radial extension  2006 , and the first and second curved extensions  2008 ,  2010 . In this configuration, a portion of the annular body  1196  along with the second inwardly extending radial extension  2002 , the second outwardly extending radial extension  2006 , and the first and second curved extensions  2008 ,  2010  are positioned between the central tubular extension  940  of the fine debris container  926  and the central tubular extension  966  of the fine debris container top  928 , thus sealing the sixth chamber C 6 , e.g., the fine debris chamber. This maintains pressure separation and prevents fluid from flowing through to the fine debris container  926 . Additionally, the second gasket  862  seals the interior of the large debris container  858  from the exterior of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . 
       FIG. 79  is a partial sectional view taken along line  79 - 79  of  FIG. 56  showing the engagement of the second locking hook  1156  of the handle  854  with one of the catches  838  of the pool cleaner body  802 . It should be understood that the description of the engagement of the second locking hook  1156  with the catch  838  also holds true for the engagement of the first locking hook  1154  with the other of the catches  838  of the pool cleaner body  802 . As previously discussed, the handle  854  is rotatably connected to the cyclone block  990  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  through engagement of the handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  of the cyclone block  990  with the mounting bosses  1164 ,  1166  of the handle  854  (see  FIGS. 69 and 75 ). When the handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  are engaged with the mounting bosses  1164 ,  1166 , the handle  854  can rotate about the engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b . As discussed in connection with  FIGS. 75-77 , the first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  extend perpendicularly from first and second ends  1160 ,  1162  of the handle frame  1158 , and include a recess  1176 ,  1178  that forms an engagement surface  1178 ,  1180 . The catches  838  of the pool cleaner body  802  are protrusions that extend inward from lateral sides of the pool cleaner body  802 . The catches  838  generally include a guide body  2018  and a hook  2020  at a distal end of the guide body  2018 . The hook  2020  defines a recess  2022  and an engagement surface  2024 . The recesses  1174 ,  1176  of the first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  are configured to receive the hooks  2020  of the catches  838 , and the recess  2022  of the catches  838  are configured to receive the first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156 , such that the engagement surfaces  1178 ,  1180  of the first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  are adjacent and in engagement with the engagement surfaces  2024  of the catches  838 . 
     To lock and unlock the handle  854 , the handle  854  can be rotated about the engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  of the cyclone block  990 . Rotation of the handle  854  causes the attached locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  to rotate as well. When the handle  854  is positioned in a vertical up position, the locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  are in a horizontal position in which they are unlocked. When the handle  854  is positioned in a horizontal down position, e.g., when it is positioned adjacent the beauty cap  852  as shown in  FIGS. 59A, 60, 61 and 79 , the locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  are in a locked position where they are in engagement with the catches  838  of the pool cleaner body  802 , thus locking the hydrocyclonic particle separator  804  with the pool cleaner body  802 . When in the locked position, the engagement surfaces  1178 ,  1180  of the first and second locking hooks  1154 ,  1156  are adjacent and in engagement with the engagement surfaces  2024  of the catches  838 , and thus the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is engaged with the pool cleaner body  804  and vertical separation of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  from the pool cleaner body  804  is prevented. Additionally, rotation of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is prevented through placement of the guide body  2018  of the catches  838  within the channel  872  formed between the guide vanes  870 . Any attempted rotation of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  will be prevented through engagement of the guide body  2018  with the guide vanes  870 . 
     When the handle  854  is in the locked position it is also secured to the beauty cap  852 , as shown in  FIG. 80  which is a partial perspective sectional view taken along line  80 - 80  of  FIG. 56 . As previously referenced in connection with  FIG. 63 , the beauty cap  852  includes notches  1148  that are configured to engage locking tabs  1172  of the handle  854 . Particularly, the notches  1148  are generally recesses formed in the beauty cap  852 , while the locking tabs  1172  are flexible components that form an engagement ledge. When the handle  854  is rotated into a locked position, the locking tabs  1172  can engage the beauty cap  852  causing them to flex outward until the handle  854  is sufficiently closed, at which point the locking tabs  1172  will return to their original position and be partially inserted into the notches  1148  of the beauty cap  852 . Engagement of the locking tabs  1172  with the notches  1148  prevents the handle  854  from inadvertently being transitioned from the locked position to the unlocked position, e.g., if the pool cleaner  800  flips over while operating, etc. The locking tabs  1172  can be disengaged from the notches  1148  simply by pulling the handle  854  upward with sufficient force. 
       FIG. 81  is a partial perspective sectional view taken along line  81 - 81  of  FIG. 60B , and showing the handle  854  in an unlocked position with the channel  1170  of the first mounting boss  1164  engaged with a protrusion  2026  of the first handle engagement tab  1010   a . Specifically, each of the handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  include a protrusion  2026  that extends partially about the circumference thereof. While  FIG. 81  only illustrates the protrusion  2026  for the first handle engagement tab  1010   a , it should be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art that the second handle engagement tab  1010   b  also includes a protrusion  2026  extending partially about the circumference thereof. As discussed in connection with  FIG. 77 , each mounting boss  1164 ,  1166  includes a channel  1170  that extends partially around the perimeter of the mounting boss  1164 ,  1166  and that is configured to receive the protrusions  2026  of the handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  in order to prevent the handle  854  from pulling away from the cyclone block  990  when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is carried by the handle  854 . Specifically, when the handle  854  is engaged with the cyclone block  990 , e.g., through engagement of the first mounting boss  1164  with the first handle engagement tab  1010   a  and engagement of the second mounting boss  1166  with the second handle engagement tab  1010   b , a user can grab and rotate the handle  854  about the first and second engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  to place it in a vertical position where the handle  854  can be used to carry the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . As the handle  854  is rotated, the channels  1170  of the first and second mounting bosses  1164 ,  1166  will also rotate causing the protrusions  2026  of the first and second handle engagement tabs  1010   a ,  1010   b  to be inserted into the channels  1170 . The engagement of the protrusions  2026  with the channels  1170  prevents the handle  854  from disengaging from the cyclone block  990  when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is carried by the handle  854 . Particularly, when carried by the handle  854 , the weight of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  can cause the handle  854  to slightly flex, which could result in the disengagement of the handle  854  from the cyclone block  990 . However, this disengagement is prevented because the protrusions  2026  will engage the walls forming the channels  1170  and be unable to disengage. Accordingly, this arrangement secures the handle  854  to the cyclone block  990  when the handle is in an unlocked or upright position. 
       FIGS. 82-85  show the check valve  866  in greater detail.  FIGS. 82-84  are respectively perspective, exploded, and front views of the check valve  866  in an open state, while  FIG. 85  is a side view of the check valve  866  in a closed position. The check valve  866  includes a frame  2028 , a medium  2030 , and a rigid rod  2032 . The frame  2028  includes rectangular body  2034  and a locking tab  2036  that extends rearward from the rectangular body  2034 . The locking tab  2036  is a flexible component that includes an angled protrusion  2038  at a distal end thereof, the angled protrusion  2038  defining an engagement shoulder  2040 . The medium  2030  is generally a bag like component that is constructed of a flexible mesh material that allows water to flow therethrough. The medium  2030  includes a proximal end  2042 , a distal end  2044 , and a body  2046  that extends and tapers from the proximal end  2042  to the distal end  2044 . The proximal end  2042  of the medium  2030  can be wrapped around the frame  2028  and sewn so that the frame  2028  is retained by the medium  2030  at the proximal end  2042 . Alternatively, the frame  2028  and the proximal end  2052  of the medium  2030  can be overmolded or sonic welded to secure the two components together, or the medium  2030  can be sewn around an O-ring and stretched over the frame  2028 , among other alternative means of attachment. The body  2046  of the medium  2030  includes a pocket  2048  at the top thereof that extends along the entire length. The pocket  2048  is sized and configured to receive the rigid rod  2032 . The rigid rod  2032  is weighted rigid component that is positioned within the pocket  2048  of the medium  2030 , and functions to shut the distal end  2044  of the medium  2030  when there is insufficient flow through the check valve  866  or a backflow through the check valve  866 . This is illustrated in  FIG. 85 , which is a side view showing the check valve  866  in a closed position, e.g., with the distal end  2044  of the medium  2030  shut. 
     The check valve  866  is removably positionable within the intake channel  906  of the canister body inlet  868 , as shown in  FIG. 61 . As shown in  FIG. 65 , the inlet  868  includes an inner latching shoulder  902  positioned in the intake channel  906 . When a user inserts the check valve  866  into the inlet  868 , such that it is positioned within the intake channel  906 , the angled protrusion  2038  of the locking tab  2036  engages the inner latching shoulder  902 . As the user continues to apply pressure to the check valve  866  during insertion, the inner latching shoulder  902  will cause the locking tab  2036  to flex through engagement with the angled protrusion  2038 . Once the check valve  866  is fully inserted and the angled protrusion  2038  is beyond the inner latching shoulder  902 , the locking tab  2036  will snap back to its initial configuration and the engagement shoulder  2040  thereof will engage the inner latching shoulder  902 . Engagement of the engagement shoulder  2040  with the inner latching shoulder  902  prevents the check valve  866  from being inadvertently removed from the inlet  868 , e.g., due to a backflow of water. However, a user can manually remove the check valve  866  by disengaging the engagement shoulder  2040  from the inner latching should  902 , and pulling the check valve  866  out from inlet  868 . 
     During operation, the check valve  866  operates to prevent debris from exiting the inlet  868  due to backflow through the inlet  868 . During normal operation, water, along with any debris, flows through the check valve  866  from the proximal end  2042  to the distal end  2044  and enters the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  to be filtered. The pressure resulting from this normal direction of flow causes the rigid rod  2032  to be maintained in a horizontal position at the top of the medium  2030 , thus allowing for debris to pass through the check valve  866 . However, there are times where the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  may experience a rush of backflow through the inlet  868  and the check valve  866 . For example, when a user turns the pool cleaner  800  off or disconnects the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  from the cleaner body  802 , water may flow out from the inlet  868 . Without the check valve  866 , debris that was originally trapped in the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  would be pulled out of the inlet  868  along with the backflow of water. However, the check valve  866  prevents this from happening. When there is a backflow of water through the inlet  868  and the check valve  866 , the pressure from the water will cause the medium  2030  to fold in on itself and thus pull the rigid rod  2032  to a generally vertical position where the entirety thereof is substantially adjacent the frame  2034 . The positioning of the rigid rod  2032  adjacent the frame  2034  will cause the medium  2030  to cover the proximal end  2042  thereof and prevent debris from exiting the proximal end  2042  of the medium  2030 , but allow water to exit the check valve  866 . Accordingly, the check valve  866  prevents debris from exiting the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  when there is a backflow rush of water. In some embodiments, the check valve  866  can be a check valve that regulates the amount of fluid flow passing through the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . 
       FIGS. 86-88  are perspective, top, and sectional views of an alternative embodiment filter medium  846   a  that is embossed. While the filter medium  846   a  is shown as a solid component herein, this is simply done for ease of illustration, and it should be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art that the filter medium  846   a  includes a number of open spaces extending therethrough and is configured to allow water to flow across it. The filter medium  846   a  includes an arcuate body  2050  made of a filter material (e.g., a fabric mesh, a plastic mesh, a molded mesh, a foam, a coarse screening media, etc.). The arcuate body  2050  extends from a first end  2052  to a second end  2054 , and includes a plurality of groups of embossed patterns  2056 . Each group of embossed patterns  2056  is made up of first and second embossments  2058   a ,  2058   b  that alternate in direction of depression. 
       FIG. 88  is a sectional view taken along line  88 - 88  of  FIG. 87  showing the first and second embossments  2058   a ,  2058   b  in greater detail. As shown in  FIG. 88 , the arcuate body  2050  of the filter medium  846   a  includes a first side  2060  and a second side  2062 . The first embossments  2058   a  protrude from the first side  2060  of the arcuate body  2050 , while the second embossments  2058   b  protrude from the second side  2062  of the arcuate body  2050 . The first and second embossments  2058   a ,  2058   b  are concave protrusions that form a convexity  2064   a ,  2064   b  on one side and a concavity  2066   a ,  2066   b  on the other, thus creating an interrupted surface. That is, the first embossments  2058   a  form a convexity  2064   a  in the first side  2060  of the arcuate body  2050  and a concavity  2066   a  in the second side  2062  of the arcuate body  2050 . In contrast, the second embossments form a convexity  2064   b  in the second side  2062  of the arcuate body  2050  and a concavity  2066   b  in the first side  2060  of the arcuate body  2050 . Each of the concavities  2066   a ,  2066   b  form a pocket  2068  in the arcuate body  2050 . Thus, the first and second embossments  2058   a ,  2058   b  form a serpentine-like pattern in the arcuate body  2050  of the filter medium  846   a . The pattern generated by the first and second embossments  2058   a ,  2058   b  acts to prevent clogging of the filter medium  846   a  by providing flow channels beneath debris that is stuck to the filter medium  846   a . That is, even when a piece of debris, e.g., a leaf, is stuck to the filter medium  846   a , it will be elevated by the convexities  2064   a ,  2064   b , and water will be able to flow underneath the debris and into the concavities  2066   a ,  2066   b . This allows the pool cleaner  800  to maintain suction during cleaning operations, even when debris is stuck to the filter medium  846   a . The embossments  2058   a ,  2058   b  can be any other alteration to the filter medium  846   a  that creates flow paths beneath debris that is trapped on the filter medium  846   a . For example, the embossments  2058   a ,  2058   b  can be pleats or texturing, or can be a raised emblem or company name. 
     The filter medium  846   a  can be an individual component that is mounted to the fine debris subassembly  844  and the cyclone block subassembly  848 , and extends about the perimeter of the fine debris subassembly  844  and the cyclone block subassembly  848 . Alternatively, the filter medium  846   a  can be mounted to a support structure such as support  428  of  FIG. 23 . 
     Turning to  FIG. 89 , an exploded view of the pool cleaner body  802  is shown. The pool cleaner body  802  includes the chassis  806 , the left and right covers  808   a ,  808   b  connected with the handle  810 , rear cover  814 , inlet top  816 , the front skin  812 , the wheels  818   a - f , the rollers  820   a - 820   f , the roller latches  832 , the roller mounts  833 , the motor box  840 , a first roller drive gear box  2070   a , a second roller drive gear box  2070   b , a first roller drive gear train  2072   a , and a second roller drive gear train  2072   b . The chassis  806  includes a body  2073 , first and second side walls  2074   a ,  2074   b  on opposite sides of the body  2073 , a motor box housing  2075  at a generally center location on the top of the chassis  806 , and first and second drive gear box housings  2076   a ,  2076   b  on opposite sides of the motor box housing  2075 . The motor box  840  includes a body  2078 , a top  2080  connected to the body  2078  by an annular snap fit about the entire circumference, first and second drive stepper motors (not shown) positioned in the body  2078 , a pump motor  2082 , and a power connector  2084  that is in electrical connection with the drive stepper motors and the pump motor  2082 . The top  2080  can include first and second protrusions  2086  that accommodate the first and second stepper motors (not shown), and the locking interface  925 . The pump motor  2082  includes a male member  2088  that extends through the top  2080  of the motor box  840  and is configured to engage the female member  1102  of the shaft  1078  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . The male member  2088  can be a spline connector, a lovejoy connector, etc. A power and control cable  2089  can be connected to the power connector  2084  to provide power and control commands to the pool cleaner  800 . The pump motor  2082  can be a brushless DC outer rotor motor. Alternatively, the pump motor  2082  can be a brushless DC inner rotor motor, a brushless DC motor, a brushed DC motor, an uncommutated DC motor, a permanent magnet DC motor, a wound stator DC motor, an AC polyphase cage rotor motor, an AC polyphaser wound rotor motor, an AC synchronous motor, etc. 
     The motor box  840  is positioned in the motor box housing  2075  of the chassis  806 , while the first and second roller drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b  are positioned on opposite sides of the motor box  840  in the first and second drive gear box housing  2076   a ,  2076   b , respectively. Each of the first and second roller drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b  is respectively in operative communication with a first and second motor (not shown) positioned within the motor box  840 . The first and second roller drive gear trains  2072   a ,  2072   b  are positioned on opposite sides of the chassis  806  and in mechanical communication with the first and second roller drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b , respectively. A first set of rollers (rollers  820   a ,  820   c ,  820   e ) are in mechanical communication with the first roller drive gear train  2072   a , which is in mechanical communication with the first roller drive gear box  2070   a  so that each of the rollers of the first roller set (e.g., rollers  820   a ,  820   c ,  820   e ) turn in the same direction and independently from a second set of rollers (rollers  820   b ,  820   d ,  820   f ). In some embodiments, each of the rollers of the first roller set (rollers  820   a ,  820   c ,  820   e ) can be independently spun relative to each other. The second set of rollers (rollers  820   b ,  820   d ,  820   f ) are in mechanical communication with the second roller drive gear train  2072   b , which is in mechanical communication with the second roller drive gear box  2070   b  so that each of the rollers of the second roller set (e.g., rollers  820   b ,  820   d ,  820   f ) turn in the same direction and independently from the first set of rollers (rollers  820   a ,  820   c ,  820   e ). In some embodiments, the rollers  820   a ,  820   c ,  820   e  of the first roller set can turn at the same rate, and the rollers of the second roller set  820   b ,  820   d ,  820   f  can turn at the same rate, while in other embodiments the rollers  820   a ,  820   c ,  820   e  of the first roller set can turn at a different rate  820   b ,  820   d ,  820   f  than the rollers of the second roller set. For the purposes of turning the pool cleaner  800 , the first set of rollers can be driven to turn in a single direction and the second set of rollers can be driven to turn in an opposing direction, thereby generating a moment for turning the pool cleaner  800 . Each of the rollers  820   a - 820   f  can be mounted to roller mounts  833  at their exterior, and to roller latches  832  at their interior. 
     The first and second roller drive gear trains  2072   a ,  2072   b  are substantially identical in construction, but placed on opposite sides of the chassis  806 . Accordingly, it should be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art that any description of the first roller drive gear train  2072   a  will hold true for the second roller drive gear train  2072   b . The first roller drive gear train  2072   a  generally consists of three drive gear assemblies  2090  and an idler gear assembly  2092 . 
     The drive gear assemblies  2090  include a drive gear  2094 , an exterior bushing half  2096 , an interior bushing half  2098 , and a roller mount  833 . The chassis  806  includes three openings  2100  in each of the first and second sidewalls  2074   a ,  2074   b  for engagement of the small gear assemblies  2090  with the chassis  806 . Particularly, for each small gear assembly  2090 , the interior bushing half  2098  is paired with an exterior bushing half  2096 , and the pair is connected and placed within an opening  2100  with the exterior bushing half  2096  positioned at an exterior portion of the respective chassis sidewall  2074   a ,  2074   b  and each interior bushing half  2098  positioned at an interior portion of the respective chassis sidewall  2074   a ,  2074   b . The openings  2100  can also be keyed, with the interior and exterior bushing halves  2096 ,  2098  having a matching key to prevent rotation of the bushing halves  2096 ,  2098  within the opening  2100 . Alternatively, the interior and exterior bushing halves  2096 ,  2098  can be formed as a single component instead of two separate pieces. When configured as a single component, the bushing can be pushed into the opening  2100  from the outside of the chassis  806  causing it to snap into place and secure to the chassis  806 . The bushing can then be disengaged from the chassis  806  from the inside of the chassis  806  by a removal tool, e.g., a flathead screwdriver. The roller mount  833  extends through the bushing halves  2074   a ,  2074   b  and can engage a respective roller  820   a - 820   f  at a first end and the drive gear  2094  at a second end. The roller mount  833  is engaged with the drive gear  2094  so that rotation of the drive gear  2094  is transferred to the roller mount  833 , which in turn rotates the roller  820   a - 820   f  that it is engaged with. Accordingly, the roller mounts  833  ride on the interior and exterior bushing halves  2096 ,  2098 , and not the chassis sidewalls  2074   a ,  2074   b . The roller drive gear trains  2072   a ,  2072   b  can be covered by the left and right covers  808   a ,  808   b.    
     The idler gear assemblies  2092  include an idler gear  2102 , an exterior bushing  2104 , and an interior bushing  2106 . The chassis  806  includes a keyed opening  2108  in each of the first and second sidewalls  2074   a ,  2074   b  that is positioned between two of the openings  2100  for the drive gear assemblies  2090 . For each idler gear assembly  2092 , the exterior bushing  2104  is paired with an interior bushing  2106 . The interior bushing  2106  is connected to and extends through the keyed opening  2108 , and is positioned at an interior portion of the respective chassis sidewall  2074   a ,  2074   b . The exterior bushing  2104  is positioned at an exterior portion of the respective chassis sidewall  2074   a ,  2074   b , extends through the center of the idler gear  2102 , and is connected with the keyed opening  2108  and the interior bushing  2106 . Accordingly, the idler gear  2102  is positioned between the exterior bushing  2104  and the chassis sidewall  2074   a ,  2074   b  such that the idler gear  2102  rides on the exterior bushing  2104 . Additionally, the keyed opening  2108  can have two different key arrangements such that the exterior bushing  2104  is configured to engage the first key arrangement and the interior bushing  2106  is configured to engage the second key arrangement. In some embodiments, the key arrangements can be asymmetrical such that the exterior bushing  2104  and the interior bushing  2106  can only engage the key arrangements in a single configuration. Furthermore, the idler gear  2102  can include a plurality of slots, e.g., four, on an interior opening thereof while the exterior bushing  2104  can include a similar slot that permits debris to fall out when the slots of the idler gear  2102  are adjacent the slot of the exterior bushing  2104 . The idler gear assembly  2092  is positioned between and engagement with two drive gear assemblies  2094 . For the first roller drive gear train  2072   a , the first roller drive gear box  2070   a  is in engagement with the third drive gear assembly  2094  and one of the two drive gear assemblies  2094  that the idler gear assembly  2092  is engaged with. For the second roller drive gear train  2072   b , the second roller drive gear box  2070   b  is in engagement with the third drive gear assembly  2094  and one of the two drive gear assemblies  2094  that the idler gear assembly  2092  is engaged with. 
     The first and second roller drive gear trains  2072   a ,  2072   b  are driven by the first and second roller drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b , respectively.  FIGS. 90-93  show the first roller drive gear box  2070   a  in greater detail. It should be understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art that the second roller drive gear box  2070   b  is substantially similar in construction to that of the first roller drive gear box  2070   a , and the description of the first roller drive gear box  2070   a  also holds true for the second roller drive gear box  2070   b .  FIGS. 90-92  are top perspective, bottom perspective, and exploded views of the first roller drive gear box  2070   a . As referenced above, the first roller drive gear box  2070   a  is removably positioned within the first drive gear box housing  2076   a . The first roller drive gear box  2070   a  generally includes a housing  2110  and a gear stack  2112 . The housing  2110  includes a first shell  2114 , a second shell  2116 , and a lid  2118 . The gear stack  2112  includes a first, second, third, and fourth double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126 , a drive gear  2128 , and an axle  2130 . Each double gear  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126  includes a first large diameter gear  2120   a ,  2122   a ,  2124   a ,  2126   a  that is coaxial and rotationally engaged with a small diameter gear  2120   b ,  2122   b ,  2124   b ,  2126   b.    
       FIG. 93  is a top view of the first roller drive gear box  2070   a  with the lid  2118  removed showing engagement of the double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126 . The double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126  are arranged such that the small diameter gear  2120   a  of the first double gear  2120  engages the large diameter gear  2122   b  of the second double gear  2122 , the small diameter gear  2122   a  of the second double gear  2122  engages the large diameter gear  2124   b  of the third double gear  2124 , and the small diameter gear  2124   a  of the third double gear  2124  engages the large diameter gear  2126   b  of the fourth double gear  2126 . This arrangement transfers rotation of the first double gear  2120  to the fourth double gear  2126 . In the present embodiment, the double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126 , as well as the small diameter gears  2120   a ,  2122   a ,  2124   a ,  2126   a  and the large diameter gears  2120   b ,  2122   b ,  2124   b ,  2126   b , have the same gear ratio, whereas in other embodiments they may have different gear ratios in order to manipulate rotational speeds. The large diameter gear  2120   a  of the first double gear  2120  can be in mechanical communication with, and be rotationally driven by, one of the drive motors (not shown) of the motor box  840 . The double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126  are secured within the housing  2110  such that they can rotate within the housing  2110 , but cannot move laterally, which prevents the double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126  from becoming disengaged from each other. The lid  2118  can be removably engaged with the housing  2110 , e.g., with screws  2131 , so that a user can access the gear stack  2112  and replace the double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126  if necessary. The housing  2110  additionally includes a proximal opening  2132  and a distal opening  2134 . The proximal opening  2132  allows for a shaft of the drive motor to extend into the roller drive gear box  2070   a  and engage the first double gear  2120 . The distal opening  2134  allows for the small diameter gear  2126   b  of the fourth double gear  2126  to extend out of the roller drive gear box  2070   a  and engage the axle  2130 . 
     The drive gear  2128  includes a toothed outer diameter  2136  and a central opening  2138  that includes a plurality of notches  2140 . The axle  2130  includes a tubular central hub  2142  that includes a plurality of external ridges  2144 . The tubular central hub  2142  is configured to be inserted into the central opening  2138  of the drive gear  2128  with the external ridges  2144  engaging the notches  2140  of the drive gear  2128  so that rotation of the axle  2130  is transferred to the drive gear  2128 . The tubular central hub  2142  of the axle  2130  is also configured to mechanically engage the small diameter gear  2126   b  of the fourth double gear  2126 , e.g., through interior teeth (not shown), such that it is rotationally driven thereby. The tubular central hub  2142  rests in the distal opening  2134  of the housing  2110 . 
     The housing  2110  also includes arcuate sidewalls  2145  that are configured to match the arcuate walls  2146  of the drive gear box housing  2076   a  of the chassis  806  (see  FIG. 89 ). This assists with alignment of the drive gear box  2070   a  with the drive gear box housing  2076   a . The drive gear box  2070   a  can be removably mounted to the chassis  806 . Particularly, the drive gear box  2070   a  can include a plurality of mounting tabs  2148  that are sized and spaced to match a plurality of mounts  2150  on the drive gear box housing  2076   a  of the chassis  806  (see  FIG. 89 ), which can be engaged by a standard fastener, e.g., a screw. This also assists with aligning the drive gear box  2070   a  with the drive gear box housing  2076   a ,  2076   b.    
     The first and second drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b  are modular assemblies that contain the gear stack  2112  that transfers rotation from the drive motors to the first and second roller drive gear trains  2072   a ,  2072   b  in order to rotate the rollers  820   a - 820   f , as discussed above. The first and second drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b  can be attached to the respective drive gear box housing  2076   a ,  2076   b , and removed therefrom in order to be replaced or serviced. This can be done simply by unscrewing the fasteners that secure the drive gear box  2070   a ,  2070   b  to the drive gear box housing  2076   a ,  2076   b  of the chassis  806 , and removing the drive gear box  2070   a ,  2070   b  from the drive gear box housing  2076   a ,  2076   b . The removed drive gear box  2070   a ,  2070   b  can then be serviced, e.g., cleaned or have double gears  2120 ,  2122 ,  2124 ,  2126  replaced, or a new drive gear box  2070   a ,  2070   b  can be installed in place of the removed drive gear box  2070   a ,  2070   b . By providing the first and second drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b  as removable modular assemblies, a user is able to extend the life of the drive motors and their pool cleaner since they will be able to replace the drive gear boxes  2070   a ,  2070   b  when needed instead of replacing the entire pool cleaner  800 . This also results in a cost savings. 
       FIGS. 94-104  illustrate a removable roller  820   a - 802   f  functionality of the present disclosure. In connection with  FIGS. 94-104 , reference is made to the first and second rollers  820   a ,  820   b  for illustrative purposes only, and it should be understood that the description provided in connection with how the first and second rollers  820   a ,  802   b  can be removably engaged with the chassis holds true for the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth rollers  820   c ,  820   d ,  820   e ,  820   f  as well.  FIGS. 94-96  are perspective, exploded, and bottom views showing the first and second rollers  820   a ,  820   b  connected to the chassis  806  with a roller latch  832 .  FIG. 97  is a bottom view of the chassis  806 . The chassis  806  includes first, second, third, and fourth roller wells  2152 ,  2154 ,  2156 ,  2158 . The first roller well  2152  is defined by a left sidewall  2160 , right sidewall  2162 , and a curved enclosure  2164  that extends between the left and right sidewalls  2160 ,  2162 . The first roller well  2152  houses the first and second rollers  820   a ,  820   b . The second roller well  2154  includes a left sidewall  2166 , an inner sidewall  2168  having a mount  2169 , and a curved enclosure  2170  that extends between the left and inner sidewalls  2166 ,  2168 . The second roller well  2154  houses the third roller  820   c . The third roller well  2156  includes a right sidewall  2172 , an inner sidewall  2174  having a mount  2175 , and a curved enclosure  2176  that extends between the right and inner sidewalls  2172 ,  2174 . The third roller well  2156  houses the fourth roller  820   d . The fourth roller well  2158  is defined by a left sidewall  2178 , right sidewall  2180 , and a curved enclosure  2182  that extends between the left and right sidewalls  2178 ,  2180 . The fourth roller well  2158  houses the fifth and sixth rollers  820   e ,  820   f . Each of the roller wells  2152 ,  2154 ,  2156 ,  2158  include a latch receiver  2184 . The latch receiver  2184  for the first and fourth roller wells  2152 ,  2158  is positioned at the middle of the respective curved enclosure  2164 ,  2182 , while the latch receiver  2184  for the second and fourth roller wells  2154 ,  2156  is positioned adjacent the respective inner sidewall  2168 ,  2174 . Each latch receiver  2184  is generally arcuate in shape and includes a slot  2186  that extends through the respective curved enclosure  2164 ,  2170 ,  2176 ,  2182 , and a mounting boss  2188 . Each slot  2186  includes an opening  2190  and a track  2192  extending from the opening  2188 . The opening  2190  has a greater width than the track  2192 . 
       FIGS. 98-100  are perspective, front, and top views of the roller latch  832 , respectively. The roller latch  832  includes a body  2194 , a rider  2196 , a first mounting protrusion  2198 , a second mounting protrusion  2200 , and a locking tab  2202 . The body  2194  generally has a quarter-circle shape and includes a first lateral side  2204 , a second lateral side  2206 , a first transverse side  2208 , a second transverse side  2210 , and an arcuate transverse side  2212 . The first and second transverse sides  2208 ,  2210  extend between the first and second lateral sides  2204 ,  2206 , and are generally perpendicular to one another. The arcuate transverse side  2212  extends between the first and second lateral sides  2204 ,  2206 , and extends from an end of the first transverse side  2208  to an end of the second transverse side  2210  in an arc. The first and second mounting protrusions  2198 ,  2200  extend perpendicularly from the first and second lateral sides  2204 ,  2206 , respectively, and are positioned at the radial center of the arcuate transverse side  2212 , e.g., the center point that the curvature of the arcuate transverse side  2212  is measured from, which is indicated as the latch axis  2214 . The locking tab  2202  extends from and is planar with the first transverse side  2208 , and includes a hole  2216  extending through it. The rider  2196  is generally t-shaped and extends from the arcuate transverse side  2212 . Particularly, the rider  2196  includes a neck  2218  and a head  2220  that extends laterally beyond the neck  2218  and includes a left shoulder  2222  and a right shoulder  2224 . The neck  2218  is connected with the arcuate transverse side  2212 , while the head  2220  is displaced from the arcuate transverse side  2212  by the neck  2218 . The rider  2196  defines a left channel  2226  and a right channel  2228 . The roller latch  832  is generally configured to rotate about the first and second mounting protrusions  2198 ,  2200  and the latch axis  2214 . 
       FIG. 101A  is a sectional view taken along line  101 - 101  of  FIG. 96 .  FIG. 101B  is an enlarged view of Area  101 B of  FIG. 101A .  FIG. 102  is a perspective view of the sectional view of  FIG. 101A .  FIGS. 101A, 101B, and 102  illustrate the roller latch  832  engaged with the first and second rollers  820   a ,  820   b  and secured to the chassis  806 . While reference is made to the first and second rollers  820   a ,  820   b  in connection with  FIGS. 101A, 101B, and 102 , it should be understood that the below description holds true for the other rollers (e.g.,  820   c ,  820   d ,  820   e ,  820   f ) as well, which are substantially similar in construction. In this regard, it is preliminarily noted that the rollers  820   a ,  820   b  are substantially similar in construction, and the same reference numeral is used for matching components. Construction of the rollers  820   a ,  820   b  is discussed in greater detail in connection with  FIGS. 105-125  below. 
     As shown in  FIGS. 101A, 101B, and 102 , the rollers  820   a ,  820   b  include a mounting boss  2230  on one side thereof, which defines an inner cavity  2232  that is configured to receive one of the first and second mounting protrusions  2198 ,  2200  of a roller latch  832 . To removably engage the roller  820   a ,  820   b  with the roller latch  832 , the first protrusion  2198  or the second protrusion  2200  is inserted into the inner cavity  2232  of the mounting boss  2230  of the respective roller  820   a ,  820   b , such that the roller  820   a ,  820   b  can rotate about the first or second protrusion  2198 ,  2200 . 
     For the first and fourth roller wells  2152 ,  2158 , which house two rollers (e.g., rollers  820   a  and  820   b , or rollers  820   e  and  820   f ) each, the roller latch  832  engages the mounting boss  2230  of both rollers (e.g., rollers  820   a ,  820   b ). Particularly, the first mounting protrusion  2198  engages the inner cavity  2232  of the first roller  820   a  and the second mounting protrusion  2200  engages the inner cavity  2232  of the second roller  820   a . This allows the two rollers (e.g., rollers  820   a  and  820   b , or rollers  820   e  and  820   f ) to rotate about the roller latch  832 . The other side of the roller  820   a ,  820   b ,  820   e ,  820   f  can be mounted to the chassis  806  with a roller mount  833  (see  FIG. 89 ). 
     For the second and fourth roller wells  2154 ,  2156 , which house one roller (e.g., roller  820   c  or roller  820   d ) each, the roller latch  832  engages the mounting boss  2230  of that roller (e.g., roller  820   c  or roller  820   d ) and the mount  2169 ,  2175  of the respective roller well  2154 ,  2156 . Particularly, the first mounting protrusion  2198  engages the inner cavity  2232  of the roller (e.g., roller  820   c  or roller  820   d ) while the second mounting protrusion  2198  is secured in the mount  2169 ,  2175 . This allows the roller (e.g., roller  820   c  or rollers  820   d ) to rotate about the roller latch  832 . The other side of the roller  820   c ,  820   d  can be mounted to the chassis  806  with a roller mount  833  (see  FIG. 89 ). 
       FIGS. 101A, 101B, and 102  also show the roller latch  832  engaged with the latch receiver  2184  of the first roller well  2152 . When the roller latch  832  is engaged with a latch receiver  2184 , the neck  2218  of the roller latch  832  is positioned within the track  2192  of the latch receiver slot  2186 , the head  2220  and the arcuate transverse side  2212  of the roller latch  832  are on opposite sides of the track  2192 , and a portion of the latch receiver  2184  is positioned within the left and right channels  2226 ,  2228  of the roller latch  832 . The head  2220  and the arcuate transverse side  2212  of the roller latch  832  are sized to be wider than the width of the track  2192  to prevent removal of the roller latch  832  from the latch receiver  2184  due to axial forces. Specifically, if a roller  820   a - 820   f  is pulled, the shoulders  2222 ,  2224  of the roller latch  832  will engage a portion of the latch receiver  2184  and prevent removal of the roller  820   a - 820   f . When the roller latch  832  is engaged with a latch receiver  2184 , the locking tab  2202  of the roller latch  832  will be positioned adjacent the mounting boss  2188  of the latch receiver  2184  such that a fastener, e.g., a screw, can be inserted through the hole  2216  of the locking tab  2202  and engaged with the mounting boss  2188  to prevent rotation of the roller latch  832 . Thus, when the neck  2218  is positioned within the track  2192 , and the locking tab  2202  is engaged with the mounting boss  2188  by a fastener, the roller latch  832  and associated rollers  820   a - 820   f  are fully secured to the chassis  806 . 
       FIGS. 103 and 104  illustrate installation of a roller latch  832  with a latch receiver  2184  of the chassis  806 .  FIG. 103  is a perspective view showing the second roller  820   b  being installed in the first roller well  2152  with a roller latch  832  engaged with the second roller  820   b , but disengaged from the latch receiver  2184 , e.g., in an unlocked position.  FIG. 104  is substantially similar to  FIG. 103 , but with the roller latch  832  rotated and in engagement with the latch receiver  2184 , e.g., in a locked position. Upon connection with the roller(s)  820   a - 820   f , the roller latch  832  can be engaged with the latch receiver  2184  for the respective roller well  2152 ,  2154 ,  2156 ,  2158 . To do so, the rollers  820   a - 820   f  and connected roller latch  832  are first positioned in their respective roller well  2152 ,  2154 ,  2156 ,  2158  (see  FIG. 103 ). The roller latch  832  is then rotated in a first direction about the latch axis  2214  (see  FIG. 104 ). When properly positioned, rotation of the roller latch  832  about the latch axis  2214  causes the rider  2196  to be inserted into the slot  2186 . Specifically, rotation causes the head  2220  and neck  2218  of the roller latch rider  2196  to be inserted into the opening  2190  and track  2192  of the latch receiver slot  2186 , respectively. The user can continue to rotate the roller latch  832  until the locking tab  2202  of the roller latch  832  is adjacent the mounting boss  2188  of the latch receiver  2184 , and a fastener, e.g., a screw, can then be inserted through the hole  2216  of the locking tab  2202  and engaged with the mounting boss  2188  to fully secure the roller latch  832  and all associated rollers  820   a - 820   f  to the chassis  806 , as shown in  FIG. 104 . The roller latch  832  and all associated rollers  820   a - 820   f  can be removed from the chassis  806  by simply removing the fastener and rotating the roller latch  832  about the latch axis  2214  in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction until the rider  2196  is entirely disengaged from the slot  2186 . 
     As discussed above, the pool cleaner  800  includes rollers  820   a - f , each of which is formed as an assembly referred to herein as roller assembly  820 .  FIGS. 105 and 106  show perspective and exploded views of the roller assembly  820 . The roller assembly  820  includes a cage assembly  2234  including a first cage half  2236  and a second cage half  2238 , a roller cover  2240  (e.g., a brush) engaged with the cage assembly  2234 , and a roller mount  833  engaged with the cage assembly  2234 . The roller assembly  820  includes a central longitudinal axis  2242  that defines the axis about which the roller assembly  820  rotates. In some embodiments, the cage assembly  2234  can be fabricated from a plastic material. 
       FIGS. 107-111  show perspective, bottom, side and top views of the first cage half  2236 . The first cage half  2236  includes a body  2244  with a top portion  2246  and a bottom portion  2248 . The top portion  2246  defines a substantially curved outer surface with a convex curvature. The bottom portion  2248  defines a substantially flat surface along the perimeter of the bottom portion  2248 , and includes a hollow inner cavity  2250  within the perimeter of the bottom portion  2248 . The flat surface of the perimeter of the bottom portion  2248  defines a mating surface configured to mate or be positioned adjacent to a complementary mating surface of the second cage half  2238 . The first cage half  2236  includes a plurality of openings  2252  of different sizes extending from the top portion  2246  into the inner cavity  2250 , and separated by ribs  2254 . The openings  2252  reduce the overall weight of the first cage half  2236  and allow for water to pass into and out of the inner cavity  2250  while maintaining the overall convex curvature of the top portion  2246 , thereby providing sufficient support to the roller cover  2240 . 
     The first cage half  2236  includes first and second side surfaces  2256 ,  2258  on opposing sides of the body  2244 . The first side surface  2256  includes a central, semicircular hole  2260  raised from the side surface  2256  to form the mounting boss  2230 . When the first side surfaces  2256  of the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  are mated together, the semicircular hole  2260  and a complementary semicircular hole of the second cage half  2238  form the inner cavity  2232  leading into cavity  2260 . The inner surface of the hole  2260  includes a supporting rib  2268  connected to the inner surface  2270  of the first cage half  2236 . The supporting rib  2268  extends substantially parallel to the central longitudinal axis  2242 . 
     The first side surface  2256  includes a slot  2262  extending substantially perpendicularly from the bottom portion  2248  a partial distance towards the top portion  2246 . The slot  2262  is disposed adjacent and offset from the hole  2260 . The first side surface  2256  includes an opening  2264  extending substantially perpendicularly to the slot  2262  and extending into the cavity  2250 . The intersection between the slot  2262  and opening  2264  forms an edge  2266  on the outer side of the first side surface  2256 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, the slot  2262  and edge  2266  form a snap fit interlocking mechanism for providing part of the engagement between the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238 . 
     The second side surface  2258  includes a bore  2272  extending from the top portion  2246  towards the bottom portion  2248 . The bore  2272  is tapered such that the diameter of the bore  2272  is greater at the top portion  2246  than at a bottom surface  2274  of the bore  2272 . At least a portion of the bore  2272  can be open to the outer edge of the second side surface  2258  such that the bore  2272  is not fully enclosed on all sides. A central opening  2276  extends through the bottom surface  2274  of the bore  2272  and has a diameter dimensioned smaller than the diameter of the bore  2272  at the bottom surface  2274 . 
     The second side surface  2258  includes a cutout  2278  (e.g., a substantially rectangular cutout) extending from the bottom portion  2248  towards the top portion  2246  to offset the bottom surface  2274  of the bore  2272  from a plane defined by the bottom portion  2248 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, the cutout  2278  is configured and dimensioned to receive and mate with a complementary extension of the second cage half  2238 . The opening  2276  can receive a fastening element (e.g., a screw or bolt) to secure the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  at the second side surface  2258 . The inner surface  2270  includes a supporting rib  2277  connected to the outer wall of the bore  2272  and extending substantially parallel to the central longitudinal axis  2242  in the direction of the supporting rib  2268 . 
     The bottom portion  2248  includes a first connecting edge  2280  and a second connecting edge  2282  on opposing sides of the first cage half  2236 . The connecting edges  2280 ,  2282  are substantially parallel to each other and perpendicular to the bottom portion  2248  of the side surfaces  2256 ,  2258 . The first connecting edge  2280  includes tabs  2284  (e.g., first tabs) spaced from each other and extending away from the bottom portion  2248 . Each tab  2284  includes an outer surface  2286  that substantially follows the curvature of the top portion  2246 , and an inner surface  2288  that is substantially linear or planar. Each tab  2284  includes a proximal end  2290  and a distal end  2292 . The distal end  2292  includes a snap engaging end formed by a tapered inner surface  2294  and an edge  2296 . The edge  2296  faces inwardly (e.g., in the direction of the central longitudinal axis  2242 ). 
     The first connecting edge  2280  further includes fingers or protrusions  2298  extending from the inner surface  2270  of the first cage half  2236  and away from the bottom portion  2248 . Because the protrusions  2298  extend from the inner surface  2270 , each protrusion  2298  is inwardly offset from the tabs  2284 . Each protrusion  2298  can be disposed spaced from but adjacent to each of the tabs  2284 . Each protrusion  2298  includes an outer surface  2300  defining a convex surface and an inner surface  2302  that is substantially linear or planar. The endpoint  2304  of the protrusion  2298  defines a rounded surface to ensure smooth introduction into and mating against the inner surface of the second cage half  2238 . 
     The first connecting edge  2280  includes engagement posts  2306  extending perpendicularly from the inner surface  2270  of the first cage half  2236  immediately adjacent to the first connecting edge  2280 . Each engagement post  2306  includes a linear extension  2308  and a perpendicular edge  2310  extending from the distal end of the linear extension  2308 . The edge  2310  can extend inwardly towards the top portion  2246 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, the engagement posts  2306  can be introduced into openings of the roller cover  2240  to maintain engagement of the roller cover  2240  with the first cage half  2236 . 
     The second connecting edge  2282  includes spaced one or more pairs of fingers or protrusions  2312 ,  2314  extending from the inner surface  2270  of the first cage half  2236  and away from the bottom portion  2248 . Each protrusion  2312 ,  2314  can be substantially similar to the protrusions  2298 , and also includes a curved outer surface  2316 , a substantially linear or planar inner surface  2318 , and a rounded endpoint  2320 . The protrusions  2312 ,  2314  can be spaced directly on opposite sides of a groove  2322  formed in the inner surface  2270 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, each groove  2322  can be configured and dimensioned to at least partially receive the outer surface of a complementary finger or protrusion extending from the second connecting edge of the second cage half  2238 . 
       FIGS. 112-116  show perspective, bottom, top and side views of the second cage half  2238 . The second cage half  2238  be substantially similar in structure to the first cage half  2236 , except for the distinctions noted herein, such as differing interlocking/engagement elements on the bottom portion and the side surfaces. The second cage half  2238  includes a body  2324  with a top portion  2326  and a bottom portion  2328 . The top portion  2326  defines a substantially curved outer surface with a convex curvature that matches the curvature of the top portion  2246  of the first cage half  2236 . Thus, when mated together at the bottom portions  2248 ,  2328 , the outer surface of the cage assembly  2234  forms a substantially cylindrical shape. 
     The bottom portion  2328  defines a substantially flat surface along the perimeter of the bottom portion  2328 , and includes a hollow inner cavity  2330  within the perimeter of the bottom portion  2328 . The flat surface of the perimeter of the bottom portion  2328  defines a mating surface configured to mate or be positioned adjacent to the mating bottom portion  2248  of the first cage half  2236 . Similar to the first cage half  2236 , the second cage half  2238  includes a plurality of openings  2332  of different sizes extending from the top portion  2326  into the inner cavity  2330 , and separated by ribs  2334 . 
     The second cage half  2238  includes first and second side surfaces  2336 ,  2338  on opposing sides of the body  2324 . The first side surface  2336  includes a central, semicircular hole  2340  raised from the side surface  2336  to form the mounting boss  2230 . When the first side surfaces  2256 ,  2336  of the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  are mated together, the semicircular holes  2260 ,  2340  form the inner cavity  2232  leading into the cavity  2330 . The inner surface of the hole  2340  includes a supporting rib  2342  connected to the inner surface  2343  of the second cage half  2238 . The supporting rib  2342  extends substantially parallel to the central longitudinal axis  2242 . 
     The first side surface  2336  includes a tab  2344  extending from the bottom portion  2328  and away from the top portion  2326 . The tab  2344  includes a substantially linear extension  2346  and a snap engaging end  2348  at the distal end of the linear extension  2346 . The snap engaging end  2348  includes a tapered outer surface  2350  and an edge  2352 . The side walls of the tab  2344  can be tapered to assist with insertion of the tab  2344  into the slot  2262  of the first cage half  2236 . In particular, during engagement of the first side surfaces  2256 ,  2336 , the tab  2344  can be inserted into the slot  2262  until the edge  2352  snaps into the opening  2264  and around the edge  2266 . The tab  2344  and slot  2262  thereby provide for a snap fit engagement between the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238 . 
     The second side surface  2338  includes an extension  2354  protruding from the bottom portion  2328 . The second side surface  2338  includes a bore  2356  extending from the top portion  2326  towards the bottom portion  2328  and into the extension  2354 . The bore  2356  can be tapered such that the diameter of the bore  2356  is greater at the top portion  2326  than at a bottom surface  2358  of the bore  2356 . At least a portion of the bore  2356  can be open to the outer edge of the second side surface  2338  such that the bore  2356  is not fully enclosed on all sides. The bore  2356  includes grooves  2360 ,  2362  on opposing sides of the bore  2356  and positioned adjacent to the outer wall of the second side surface  2338 . The grooves  2360 ,  2362  also extend from the top portion  2326  to the bottom surface  2358 . The grooves  2360 ,  2362  provide a guided passage for insertion of the roller mount  833 . 
     A central opening  2364  extends through the bottom surface  2358  of the bore  2356  and has a diameter dimensioned smaller than the diameter of the bore  2356  at the bottom surface  2358 . During assembly, the extension  2354  can be mated with the cutout  2278  of the first cage half  2236  until the openings  2276 ,  2364  are aligned and positioned adjacent to each other. The fastening element (e.g., a screw or bolt) can be passed through the openings  2276 ,  2364  and into the roller mount  833  to secure the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  at the second side surfaces  2258 ,  2338 . 
     The bottom portion  2328  includes a first connecting edge  2366  and a second connecting edge  2368  on opposing sides of the second cage half  2238  configured to mate with first and second connecting edges  2280 ,  2282  of the first cage half  2236 , respectively. The connecting edges  2366 ,  2368  are substantially parallel to each other and perpendicular to the bottom portion  2328  of the side surfaces  2336 ,  2338 . The first connecting edge  2366  includes tabs  2370  (e.g., second tabs) spaced from each other and extending away from the bottom portion  2328 . Each tab  2370  can be inwardly offset from the plane defined by the first connecting edge  2366  (e.g., the outer surface of the second cage half  2238 ) towards the central longitudinal axis  2242 . Rounded flanges  2372 ,  2374  connect each tab  2370  to the first connecting edge  2366 . 
     Each tab  2370  can be substantially similar to the tabs  2284 , except that the snap engaging end is directed outwardly in the opposing direction. In particular, each tab  2370  includes an outer surface  2376  and an inner surface  2378  that are substantially linear or planar. Each tab  2370  includes a proximal end  2380  and a distal end  2382 . The distal end  2382  includes a snap engaging end formed by a tapered outer surface  2384  and an edge  2386 . The edge  2386  faces outwardly (e.g., in the direction away from the central longitudinal axis  2242 ). The first connecting edge  2366  includes shoulders or grooves  2388  formed at the edge of the first connecting edge  2366  and extending along the inner surface  2343 . The grooves  2388  are disposed adjacent to the tabs  2370 . Each groove  2388  can be configured and dimensioned to at least partially receive the outer surface  2300  of the protrusions  2298  of the first cage half  2236 . 
     The first connecting edge  2366  includes engagement posts  2390  extending perpendicularly from the inner surface  2343  of the second cage half  2238  immediately adjacent to the first connecting edge  2366 . Each engagement post  2390  includes a linear extension  2392  and a perpendicular edge  2394  extending from the distal end of the linear extension  2392 . The edge  2394  can extend inwardly towards the top portion  2326 . As will be discussed in greater detail below, the engagement posts  2390  can be introduced into openings of the roller cover  2240  to maintain engagement of the roller cover  2240  with the second cage half  2238 . 
     The second connecting edge  2368  includes fingers or protrusions  2396  (substantially similar to the protrusions  2312 ,  2314 ) extending from the inner surface  2343  of the second cage half  2238  and away from the bottom portion  2328 . Each protrusion  2396  includes a curved outer surface  2398 , a substantially linear or planar inner surface  2400 , and a rounded endpoint  2402 . The second connecting edge  2368  includes a groove  2404 ,  2406  formed in the inner surface  2343  immediately adjacent to and on opposite sides of each protrusion  2396 . Each groove  2404 ,  2406  can be configured and dimensioned to at least partially receive the outer surface  2316  of the respective protrusions  2312 ,  2314  extending from the second connecting edge  2282  of the first cage half  2236 . 
       FIGS. 117-119  show perspective and detailed views of the cage assembly  2234  including the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  detachably interlocked relative to each other. During assembly, the second connecting edges  2282 ,  2368  are mated first as shown in  FIG. 119 . The second connecting edges  2282 ,  2268  can be positioned adjacent to each other such that the protrusion  2396  of the second cage half  2238  is aligned with the groove  2322  between the protrusions  2312 ,  2314  of the first cage half  2236 . As the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  are rotated towards each other using the second connecting edges  2282 ,  2268  as a pivot point, the outer surface  2398  of the protrusion  2396  at least partially enters and engages the groove  2322  of the first cage half  2236 . At substantially the same time, the outer surfaces  2316  of the protrusions  2312 ,  2314  at least partially enter and engage the grooves  2404 ,  2406  of the second cage half  2238 . 
     After engagement of the second connecting edges  2282 ,  2368 , the first connecting edges  2280 ,  2366  can be engaged as shown in  FIG. 118 . As the first connecting edges  2280 ,  2366  are biased toward each other, the tabs  2284 ,  2370  at least partially flex and snap around each other to interlock the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238 . In particular, the inner surface  2280  of the tab  2284  mates against the outer surface  2376  of the tab  2370 . The tabs  2284 ,  2370  are dimensioned such that the edge  2386  of the tab  2370  snaps around and engages an inner edge of one of the openings  2252  of the first cage half  2236 , and the edge  2296  of the tab  2284  snaps around and engages the distal end  2380  of the tab  2370 , thereby inhibiting disengagement between the tabs  2284 ,  2370 . 
     To ensure that the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  do not disengage from each other during impact to the cage assembly  2234 , the protrusions  2298  of the first cage half  2236  engage the inner surface  2343  of the second cage half  2238 . In particular, as the tab  2284  slides over and engages the outer surface of the second cage half  2238 , the outer surface  2300  of the protrusion  2298  slides into the groove  2388  formed in the inner surface  2343  of the second cage half  2238 . The tab  2284  and protrusion  2298  therefore engage the first connecting edge  2366  of the second cage half  2238  from both the outer and inner surface  2343 . If the cage assembly  2234  is impacted during use, the protrusion  2298  prevents the tab  2284  from lifting upwardly away from the tab  2370 , thereby preventing disengagement between the tabs  2284 ,  2370 . Thus, secure engagement of the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  is maintained. 
     The tabs  2284 ,  2370  can be disengaged manually by flexing the tabs  2284 ,  2370  away from each other and pivoting the first connecting edges  2280 ,  2366  away from each other. As noted above, during engagement of the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238 , the tab  2344  of the second cage half  2238  snaps into and engages the opening  2264  of the first cage half  2236  to prevent separation of the first side surfaces  2256 ,  2336 . In some embodiments, weights can be inserted into the inner cavity  2250 ,  2330  between the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  to control or customize the weight of the swimming pool cleaner  800 . The weights can be greater in size than the openings  2254 ,  2332  such that the weights are maintained within the inner cavity  2250 ,  2330  while allowing a user to visualize the number of weights in the cage assembly  2234 . In one embodiment, the weights can be used to adjust the buoyancy of the swimming pool cleaner  800 . In some embodiments, the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  can be sonic welded, clamped, or can include a living hinge therebetween. 
       FIGS. 120 and 121  show perspective and bottom views of the exemplary roller cover  2240 . The roller cover  2240  can be fabricated from a flexible material (e.g., rubber, silicone, or the like) such that the roller cover  2240  can be rolled around the cage assembly  2234  to provide traction to the swimming pool cleaner  800 . The roller cover  2240  includes a body  2408  with a top or outer surface  2410  and a bottom or inner surface  2412 . The roller cover  2240  includes a first end  2414  configured to engage with the first cage half  2236  and a second end  2416  on the opposing side of the body  2408  configured to engage with the second cage half  2238 . The roller cover  2240  includes side edges  2418 ,  2420  extending between the first and second ends  2414 ,  2416 . 
     The first end  2414  includes a first set of spaced openings  2422  (e.g., substantially square openings) adjacent to the edge of the first end  2414 . The openings  2422  can be configured and dimensioned to receive therethrough engagement posts  2306  of the first cage half  2236 . The first end  2414  includes a second set of spaced openings  2424  offset further from the edge of the first end  2414  than the openings  2422 . Each of the openings  2424  can be positioned substantially between the openings  2422 , and is configured and dimensioned to receive therethrough the tabs  2284  and protrusions  2298  of the first cage half  2236 . 
     Similar to the first end  2414 , the second end  2416  includes a first set of spaced openings  2426  (e.g., substantially square openings) adjacent to the edge of the second end  2416 . The openings  2426  can be configured and dimensioned to receive therethrough engagement posts  2390  of the second cage half  2238 . The second end  2416  includes a second set of spaced openings  2428  offset further from the edge of the second end  2416 . Each of the openings  2428  can be positioned substantially between the openings  2426 , and is configured and dimensioned to receive therethrough the tabs  2370  of the second cage half  2238 . 
     The side edge  2418  can include two cutouts  2430 ,  2432 . The cutout  2430  can be configured and dimensioned complementary to the outer surface of extension  2354  of the second cage half  2238  such that when the roller cover  2240  is rolled over the second cage half  2238 , the edges of the cutout  2430  slide over and around the extension  2354 . The cutout  2432  can be configured and dimensioned complementary to the outer surface of structure forming the bore  2272  of the first cage half  2236  such that when the roller cover  2240  is rolled over the first cage half  2236 , the edges of the cutout  2432  slide over and around the structure forming the bore  2272 . The side edge  2420  can be substantially linear (e.g., without cutouts). 
     The outer surface  2410  of the roller cover  2240  can include a plurality of traction elements  2434  extending therefrom. In some embodiments, the traction elements  2434  can be substantially similar in size and/or shape. In some embodiments, the traction elements  2434  adjacent to the side edges  2418 ,  2420  can include chamfered corners  2436  to ensure that the roller  820  passes objects in the swimming pool without catching on edges of the objects. In some embodiments, the traction elements  2434  can be of different sizes. In some embodiments, the traction elements  2434  can be in the form of, tapered linear extensions, bristles, or the like. the inner surface  2414  can be substantially flat or planar with no extensions. 
       FIG. 122  shows a top view of the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  partially interlocked with the roller cover  2240 . During assembly, the engagement posts  2306  of the first cage half  2236  can be passed through the openings  2422 , thereby aligning the tabs  2284  and protrusions  2298  with the openings  2424 . The engagement posts  2390  of the second cage half  2238  can be passed through the openings  2426 , thereby aligning the tabs  2370  with the openings  2428 . From the position shown in  FIG. 122 , the first cage half  2236  can be rolled clockwise such that the top surface or portion  2246  of the first cage half  2236  mates against the bottom surface  2412  of the roller cover  2240 . The second cage half  2238  can be rolled counter-clockwise such that the top surface or portion  2326  of the second cage half  2238  mates against the bottom surface  2412  of the roller cover  2240 . 
     Continued rolling of the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  first interlocks the second connecting edges  2282 ,  2368 , and subsequently interlocks the first connecting edges  2280 ,  2366  similar to  FIGS. 117-119 , while stretching the roller cover  2240  over the cage assembly  2234 . The roller cover  2240  is thereby mated against the outer surface of the cage assembly  2234  and engagement of the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  prevents separation of the roller cover  2240  from the cage assembly  2234 . 
       FIGS. 123 and 124  are perspective and side views of an exemplary roller mount  833 . The roller mount  833  includes a proximal end  2438  and a distal end  2440 . The proximal end  2438  includes a substantially cylindrical extension  2442  with two linear flanges  2444 ,  2446  extending from opposite sides of the extension  2442 . The extension  2442  includes an opening  2448  extending therethrough. In some embodiments, the opening  2448  can include internal threads configured to engage with a fastener. The roller mount  833  extends through the exterior and interior bushing halves  2096 ,  2098 . 
     The roller mount  833  includes a geared section  2454  that extends from the substantially cylindrical extension  2442  and through the exterior and interior bushing halves  2096 ,  2098 . The geared section  2454  includes a cylindrical body  2456  with linear protrusions  2458  extending parallel to the central longitudinal axis  2242 . The distal end  2440  includes a central bore  2460  (e.g., a threaded bore) extending partially into the roller mount  833  along the central longitudinal axis  2242 . The geared section  2454  can engage with a complementary opening within components configured to rotate the roller  820 , and a fastener can be introduced into the central bore  2460  to maintain engagement of the roller mount  833  with such components. 
     During assembly, after the roller cover  2240  has been rolled over the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238 , and the first and second cage halves  2236 ,  2238  have been interlocked relative to each other, the roller mount  833  can be engaged with the second side surfaces  2258 ,  2338  of the first and second halves  2236 ,  2238 . In particular, as shown in  FIG. 125 , the flanges  2444 ,  2446  can be slid into the grooves  2360 ,  2362  of the bore  2356 , and the extension  2442  can be slid into the bore  2356  until the extension  2442  and flanges  2444 ,  2446  abut the bottom surface  2358  of the bore  2356 . The flanges  2444 ,  2446  maintain the roller mount  833  engaged with the second cage half  2238 . A fastener (e.g., a screw, bolt, or the like) can be passed through the opening  2276  of the first cage half  2236 , through the opening  2364  in the second cage half  2238 , and threaded into the opening  2448  of the roller mount  833 . Engagement of the fastener with the opening  2448  squeezes the extension  2354  into the cutout  2278  and ensures engagement between the second side surfaces  2258 ,  2338 . 
       FIGS. 126-131  illustrate alternative embodiments for coupling the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  to the pool cleaner body  802 .  FIG. 126  is a sectional view taken along line  126 - 126  of  FIG. 56 , and  FIG. 127  is an enlarged view of Area  127  of  FIG. 126 . As explained in detail above, the pool cleaner  800  includes a pool cleaner body  802  and a hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804 . The shaft  1078  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is rotatably driven by the pump motor  2082  through engagement of the male member  2088  of the pump motor  2082  with the female member  1102  of the shaft  1078 . The impeller  1082  is interconnected with the shaft  1078  such that it rotates along with the shaft  1078 . As shown in  FIGS. 126 and 127 , the pump motor  2082  includes a stator  2462  having a plurality of electromagnets and a rotor  2464  having permanent magnets  2466  and a rotor shaft  2468 . The male member  2088  is connected to the rotor shaft  2468  such that when power is applied to the pump motor  2082  the electromagnets  2466  and rotor  2464  rotate, which causes the male member  2088  to rotate. In the embodiment of  FIGS. 126 and 127 , the male member  2088  is an external (e.g., male) spline component, while the female member  1102  of the shaft  1078  is an internal (e.g., female) spline component. In one alternative embodiment, the male member  2088  can be one half of a blender coupler while the female member  1102  is a second half of a blender coupler. In a second alternative embodiment, the male member  2088  can be one half of a lovejoy coupler while the female member  1102  is a second half of a lovejoy coupler. 
       FIG. 128  is similar to the sectional view of  FIG. 127 , but with an alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocylonic particle separator assembly  804  to the pool cleaner body  802 . Specifically, instead of the male member  2088  and the female member  1102 , the embodiment of  FIG. 128  includes a driving magnetic member  2470  and a driven magnetic member  2472 . The driving magnetic member  2470  is implemented in place of the male member  2088  and is connected to the rotor shaft  2468  such that rotation of the rotor shaft  2468  is transferred to the driving magnetic member  2470 . The driven magnetic member  2472  is implemented in place of the female member  1102  and is connected to the shaft  1078  such that rotation of the driven magnetic member  2472  is transferred to the shaft  1078  and thus the impeller  1082 . The driving magnetic member  2470  and the driven magnetic member  2472  are configured to magnetically engage each other when they are adjacent. Accordingly, when power is applied to the pump motor  2082  the rotor shaft  2468  rotates the driving magnetic member  2008  which causes the driven magnetic member  2472  to rotate due to their magnetic engagement, which in turn causes the shaft  1078  and impeller  1082  to rotate. 
       FIG. 129  is similar to the sectional view of  FIG. 127 , but with another alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  to the pool cleaner body  802 . Specifically, instead of the male member  2008  and the female member  1102 , the embodiment of  FIG. 129  includes a rotor  2474  extending from the shaft  1078  and a motor stator  2476  positioned within the motor box  840 . As shown in  FIG. 129 , the rotor  2474  can include a rod  2478  extending from the shaft  1078  and a casing  2480  attached to the end of the rod  2478 . The casing  2480  defines an inner chamber  2482  and includes internal permanent magnets  2484 . The casing  2480  can extend from the large debris container  858  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  and is configured to be placed over the motor stator  2476  with the motor stator  2476  placed within the inner chamber  2482 . The motor stator  2476  includes a plurality of electromagnets that are configured to interact with the internal permanent magnets  2484  of the rotor  2474  and rotationally drive the rotor  2474 . When the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is placed onto the pool cleaner body  802  the rotor  2474  can extend through an enlarged opening  2486  in the top  2080  of the motor box  840  and surround the motor stator  2476 . Power can be supplied to the motor stator  2476  to energize the electromagnets and thus rotatably drive the casing  2480  (and therefore the rotor  2474 ) through electromagnetic interaction with the permanent magnets  2486 . Accordingly, the rotor  2474  and the motor stator  2476  together function as a brushless DC motor. 
       FIG. 130  is similar to the sectional view of  FIG. 127 , but with another alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  to the pool cleaner body  802 . Specifically, instead of the male member  2088 , the female member  1102 , and the pump motor  2082 , the embodiment of  FIG. 130  includes an alternative pump motor  2488  in the second end  1112  of the sleeve  1080 , along with an inductive coupling receiver circuit  2492  that is in electrical communication with the alternative pump motor  2488 . The alternative pump motor  2488  receives electrical power from the inductive coupling receiver circuit  2492  and rotatably drives the shaft  1078 . The motor box  840  includes an inductive coupling transmitter circuit  2494  that can have electrical power supplied thereto, e.g., by the power and control cable  2089  (see  FIG. 89 ). When the inductive coupling receiver circuit  2492  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is adjacent the inductive coupling transmitter circuit  2494  of the pool cleaner body  802  (e.g., when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is placed onto the pool cleaner body  802 ) electrical power is inductively transferred from the inductive coupling transmitter circuit  2494  to the inductive coupling receiver circuit  2492 , which uses the electrical power to operate the alternative pump motor  2488 . Accordingly, electrical power is wirelessly transferred to the alternative pump motor  2488 , which uses the power to rotate the shaft  1078  and thus the impeller  1082 . 
       FIG. 131  is similar to the sectional view of  FIG. 127 , but with another alternative embodiment for coupling the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  to the pool cleaner body  802 . Specifically, instead of the male member  2088 , the female member  1102 , and the pump motor  2082 , the embodiment of  FIG. 131  includes an alternative pump motor  2496  placed in the second end  1112  of the sleeve  1080 , along with a contact plate  2498  that is in electrical communication with the alternative pump motor  2496 . The alternative pump motor  2496  receives electrical power from the conductive contact plate  2498  and rotatably drives the shaft  1078 . The motor box  840  includes power circuitry  2500  that is in electrical communication with a plurality of spring-loaded pogo pins  2502  that extend from the motor box  840 . The power circuitry  2500  can have electrical power supplied thereto, e.g., by the power and control cable  2089  (see  FIG. 89 ). When the conductive contact plate  2498  of the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is in contact with and compresses the spring-loaded pogo pins  2502  of the pool cleaner body  802  (e.g., when the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is placed onto the pool cleaner body  802 ) electrical power is transferred from the spring-loaded pogo pins  2502  to the conductive contact plate  2498 , which uses the electrical power to operate the alternative pump motor  2496 . Accordingly, electrical power is transferred to the alternative pump motor  2496 , which uses the power to rotate the shaft  1078  and thus the impeller  1082 . 
       FIGS. 132-133  illustrate the ability of the front skin  812  (having a first ornamental appearance) to be removed and replaced with an alternative skin (having a second ornamental appearance that can be, but is not necessarily, different than the first ornamental appearance).  FIG. 132  is a perspective view of the pool cleaner  800  with the front skin  812  removed. As shown in  FIG. 132 , the front skin  812  is of a first design and includes a plurality of holes  2504  and a plurality of mounting brackets  2506  that allow the front skin  812  to be removably mounted to the chassis  806 . When the front skin  812  is mounted to the chassis  806  it generally lies flush with the left and right covers  808   a ,  808   b , conceals a portion of the chassis  806 , and surrounds a portion of the motor box  840 , as shown in  FIGS. 51 and 58 . To remove the front skin  812 , a user removes the fasteners (not shown) that secure the front skin  812  to the chassis  806  and disconnects the front skin  812 . The front skin  812  can then be replaced by an alternative front skin  2508 , as shown in the perspective view of  FIG. 133 . The alternative front skin  2508  can have a different ornamental appearance than the original front skin  812 . For example, the alternative front skin  2508  can have a front bar  2510  that gives the pool cleaner  800  an “X”-shaped profile. As another option, the alternative front skin  2508  can be the same design as the original front skin  812 , and can simply be a replacement if the original front skin  812  becomes damaged or can have a different color scheme. The alternative front skin  2508  can be connected to the pool cleaner  800  in the same fashion as that of the original front skin  812 , e.g., through fasteners (not shown) that secure it to the chassis  806 . The replaceable front skin functionality allows for the pool cleaner  800  to be customized by a user and for the front skin  812  to be replaced if it becomes damaged. It should be understood by one of ordinary skill in the art that the front skin  812  is just one exemplary embodiment of many options. 
       FIGS. 134-170  illustrate a power supply  2512  and associated elements of the present disclosure.  FIGS. 134-141  are respectively front perspective, rear perspective, front, rear, left side, right side, top, and bottom views of the power supply  2512 . The power supply  2512  is a switch mode universal power supply that provides power and control commands to a pool cleaner, e.g., the pool cleaners  100 ,  700 ,  800  of the present disclosure. The power supply  2512  generally includes a front housing  2514 , a user interface  2516 , a mid trim  2518 , a rear housing  2520 , a female power and communication output port  2522 , an AC power input connector  2524  having a cover  2526 , a kickstand  2530 , a fan  2532 , and a fan cover  2534 .  FIGS. 142 and 143  are respectively right side and top views of the power supply  2512  with the kickstand  2530  in an open position. The power supply  2512  can receive power from an AC power source through a conduit  2528  that can be connected to the AC power input connector  2524 . The power and control cable  2089  (see  FIG. 89 ) can be connected to the female power and communication output port  2522  so that the pool cleaner  800  can receive power and control commands from the power supply  2512 . 
       FIG. 144  is an exploded view of the power supply  2512  showing additional and internal components. In addition to those components listed above, the power supply  2512  includes a light baffle  2536 , a user interface printed circuit board (PCB)  2538 , a potted power converter board assembly  2540 , a foam filler  2542 , and a plurality of fasteners  2544 . The user interface  2516  includes a graphic overlay  2546 , a graphic overlay adhesive  2548 , and an actuator circuit  2550 . The graphic overlay  2546  can include a plurality of semi-transparent indicia. The actuator circuit  2550  includes a plurality first, second, and third buttons  2552   a ,  2552   b ,  2552   c , a connector extension  2554 , and a connector  2556 . The front housing  2514  can include a user interface recess  2558  that includes a plurality of light openings  2560  and a connector opening  2562 . The user interface  2516  can be positioned in the user interface recess  2558  with the connector extension  2554  of the actuator circuit  2550  extending through the connector opening  2562  so that the connector  2556  can engage the user interface PCB  2538 , which is generally positioned rearward of the front housing  2514 . The actuator circuit  2550  can be secured in the user interface recess  2558  by an adhesive, while the graphic overlay  2546  can be secured in the user interface recess  2558  overlaying the actuator circuit  2550  by the graphic overlay adhesive  2548 . The connector  2556  can be interconnected with a user interface port  2564  on the user interface PCB  2538  so that the actuator circuit  2550  can receive low power from the user interface PCB  2538  and can communicate with the user interface PCB  2538 . Specifically, the actuator circuit  2550  can send signals to the user interface PCB  2538  when the buttons  2552   a ,  2552   b ,  2552   c  are actuated, and the user interface PCB  2538  can in turn send control commands to the pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800 . 
     The user interface PCB  2538  includes a microcontroller  2566 , a power converter board connector  2568 , and a plurality of light-emitting diodes (LEDs)  2570 . The power converter board connector  2568  allows the user interface PCB  2538  to be in communication with, and receive power from a power printed circuit board (“PCB”)  2578  (see  FIG. 148A ) (which can be a high-power PCB) of the potted power converter board assembly  2540 . The microcontroller  2566  can monitor the temperature of the power PCB  2578 . The microcontroller  2566  can also communicate the temperature of the power PCB  2578  to the associated pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  which modifies operation in response to the monitored temperature. For example, if the cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  determines that the power PCB  2578  is too hot then the pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  can operate with a reduced power consumption, e.g., the drive motors of the pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  can be operated at a reduced power consumption level, certain modes of operation can be restricted or prevented, e.g., wall climb mode, or the pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  can be shutdown completely if necessary. The user interface PCB  2538  can also include WiFi connectivity so that it can receive instructions over a WiFi network. Additionally, the user interface PCB  2538  can include a real-time clock to maintain pool cleaner schedules. 
     The light baffle  2536  is positioned over the LEDs  2570  of the user interface PCB  2538  and includes a plurality of apertures  2572  that are arranged to match the arrangement of the LEDs  2570  on the user interface PCB  2538  and the arrangement of the light openings  2560  of the user interface recess  2558 . The light baffle  2536  reduces cross talk between the LEDs  2570 , and can be made of santoprene. Accordingly, the LEDs  2570  can shine through the apertures  2572  of the light baffle  2536  and the light openings  2560  of the user interface recess  2558  and illuminate the graphic overlay  2546 . The light baffle  2536  additionally includes vents. 
     A user can engage the user interface  2516  and actuate the first, second, and third buttons  2552   a ,  2552   b ,  2552   c  to perform a variety of functions. The first button  2552   a  can be a power button such that a user can press the first button  2552   a  to toggle between a powered state and a standby state. Additionally, a user can press and hold the first button  2552   a  for a predetermined period of time, e.g., three seconds, to start the pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  or shut the pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  off. The second button  2552   b  can be a schedule select button such that a user can press the second button  2552   b  to scroll through schedule settings, e.g., single cycle, continuous cycle, etc. Additionally, a user can press and hold the second button  2552   b  for a predetermined period of time, e.g., two seconds, to dim the LEDs  2570  of the user interface  2516 . The third button  2552   c  can be a mode select button such that a user can press the third button  2552   c  to scroll through the different pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  modes of operation, e.g., bottom mode, wall climb mode, etc. Additionally, a user can press and hold the third button  2552   c  for a predetermined period of time, e.g., two seconds, to brighten the LEDs  2570  of the user interface  2516 . The user interface  2516  has additional functionality whereby a user can press and hold all three buttons  2552   a ,  2552   b ,  2552   c  for a predetermined period of time, e.g., ten seconds, to perform a factory reset. Additionally, the user can press and hold two of the first, second, and third buttons  2552   a ,  2552   b ,  2552   c , e.g., the second and third buttons  2552   b ,  2552   c , for a predetermined period of time, e.g., ten seconds, to reset the WiFi connection of the power supply  2512 . The various symbols on the graphic overlay  2546  can be illuminated based on the schedule that is being ran and the mode that the pool cleaner  100 ,  700 ,  800  is operating in. Additionally, the user interface  2516  can include indicia on the graphic overlay  2546  that inform a user that the hydrocyclonic particle separator assembly  804  is full and needs to be emptied. 
     Turning back to  FIG. 144 , the user interface PCB  2538  can be mounted to the front housing  2514  and the potted power converter board assembly  2540  can have a plurality of stops  2574  that are configured to engage the user interface PCB  2538  and restrict flexion thereof. Particularly, if the power supply  2512  is dropped on its face, e.g., with the user interface  2516  down, the stops  2574  will prevent the user interface PCB  2538  from deflecting and reduce the strain on the user interface PCB  2538 . This prevents the user interface PCB  2538  from breaking. The potted power converter board assembly  2540  is retained between the front housing  2514  and the rear housing  2520 . The rear housing  2520  can be interconnected with the front housing  2514  by the fasteners  2544  with the mid trim  2518  placed between, and about the perimeters of, the rear housing  2520  and the front housing  2514 . The fan  2532  can also be positioned within the rear housing  2520  adjacent the potted power converter board assembly  2540  to cool the potted power converter board assembly  2540  through forced convection. The fan  2532  can be removably secured to the rear housing  2520  by the fan cover  2534 . The kickstand  2530  can also be connected to the rear housing  2520  without the use of fasteners. The kickstand  2530  is discussed in greater detail below in connection with  FIGS. 161-169 . 
     Turning now to  FIGS. 145-151 , the potted power converter board assembly  2540  is shown in greater detail.  FIGS. 145 and 146  are respectively front perspective and front views of the potted power converter board assembly  2540 .  FIGS. 147 a  and 147 b    are rear perspective views of the potted power converter board assembly  2540 . Specifically,  FIG. 147 a    shows the electrical components of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  covered and isolated in a potting compound  2582 , while  FIG. 147 b    shows the electrical components of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  exposed prior to being encased in the potting compound  2582 .  FIGS. 148A and 148B  are respectively front and rear perspective view of the potted power converter board assembly  2540 . 
     The potted power converter board assembly  2540  includes a contoured tray  2576 , a power printed circuit board (PCB)  2578 , a heat sink  2580 , the female power and communication output port  2522 , the AC power input connector  2524 , and potting compound  2582  (see  FIG. 147A ). The contoured tray  2576  includes a body  2584 , a sidewall  2586  extending about the perimeter of the body  2584  and including a connector opening  2588  and a port opening  2590 , and a plurality mounting brackets  2592 . The body  2584  and the sidewall  2586  define an interior cavity  2594  that is configured to receive and house the power PCB  2578 . The body  2584  includes a plurality of contours  2596  that form corresponding interior recesses  2598 . The interior recesses  2598  form a part of the interior cavity  2594 . The contours  2596  and corresponding interior recesses  2598  are positioned and configured to match with the various electronic components  2600 , e.g., capacitors, transformers, etc., that are mounted on a first side  2602  of the power PCB  2578 . Particularly, the electronic components  2600  mounted on the first side  2602  of the power PCB  2578  create a contoured landscape or skyline, and that contours and corresponding interior recesses  2598  of the contoured tray  2576  are formed to create a matching contoured landscape or skyline such that when the power PCB  2578  is positioned in the contoured tray  2576 , the electronic components  2600  thereof match the recesses  2598  and there is a thin consistent space between the electronic components  2600  and the contoured tray  2576  where potting compound  2582  is positioned. This is illustrated in  FIGS. 150 and 151 , which are side-by-side comparisons of the contoured tray  2576  and the power PCB  2578 . Particularly,  FIG. 150  is a front view of the contoured tray  2576  and the power PCB  2578  side-by-side, while  FIG. 151  is a side view of the contoured tray  2576  and the power PCB  2578  side-by-side. As is shown in  FIGS. 150 and 151 , the contours  2596 , and thus recesses  2598 , of the contoured tray  2576  are positioned such that they align with the electronic components  2600  of the power PCB  2578  that protrude from the power PCB  2578 . 
     The female power and communication output port  2522  is interconnected with the power PCB  2578  and includes an overmolded barrier  2604  that is configured to be secured in the port opening  2590  and functions as a dam during potting. The AC power input connector  2524  is configured to be inserted into the connector opening  2588  and in electrical communication with the power PCB  2578 . The AC power input connector  2524  can be an IEC C14 female connector. The heat sink  2580  includes a plurality of mounting tabs  2606  and is secured to a second side  2608  of the power PCB  2578  opposite the first side  2602  where the electronic components  2600  are mounted, and transfers heat away from the power PCB  2578 . The heat sink  2580  can be a folded sheet metal heat sink. 
     As referenced above, the power PCB  2578  is secured in the contoured tray  2576  by the potting compound  2582 , as shown in  FIG. 147A . Particularly, the power PCB  2578  is placed in the contoured tray  2576  with the barrier  2604  secured in the port opening  2590  and the AC power input connector  2524  inserted into the connector opening  2588 , as shown in  FIG. 147B . Then, the potting compound  2582  is poured over the power PCB  2578  until there is a thin layer covering the second side  2608  of the power PCB  2578  with the majority of the heat sink  2580  left exposed (as shown in  FIG. 147A ), and allowed to cure. The barrier  2604  acts as a dam and prevents the potting compound  2582  from leaking from the contoured tray  2576 . The only components that are not fully encased in potting compound  2582  are user interface low-power wires  2610  and fan low-power wires  2612 , e.g., low power components. The user interface low-power wires  2610  are connectable to the power converter board connector  2568 , which can be a six pin bus, to provide low power to the user interface PCB  2538 . The fan low-power wires  2612  are connected to the fan  2532  to provide low power thereto. As such, all high power components are completely encapsulated by the potting compound  2582 , and the high power section of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  is completely isolated. This ensures that the potted power converter board assembly  2540  complies with all UL requirements and standards. 
       FIG. 152  is a sectional view of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  taken along line  152 - 152  of  FIG. 146 . As can be seen in  FIG. 152 , there is minimal potting compound  2582  on top of the power PCB  2578  and between the electrical components  2590  and the contoured tray  2576 . Additionally, this layer of potting compound  2582  has a consistent thickness due to the matching of the contoured tray  2576  with the electrical components  2590  of the power PCB  2578 , as discussed above. By maintaining a thin consistent layer of potting compound  2582 , as opposed to a thicker inconsistent layer, the potted power converter board assembly  2540  will have unified strain on the power PCB  2578  and electrical components  2590  thereof that prevents pulling away of the electrical components  2590  during thermal expansion of the potted compound  2582 . This is of particular significance for electrical components  2590  that are pin mounted, which have less solder per foot print ration in comparison to surface mounted components, and are therefore less robust. Additionally, since the contoured tray  2576  is contoured to match the electrical components  2590  of the power PCB  2578 , e.g., instead of being a generic volume such as a cuboid, it limits the amount of potting compound  2582  that is required, which reduces the weight of the potted power converter board assembly  2540 . Further, having the high-power components of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  entirely isolated from the low-power components of the user interface  2516  and user interface PCB  2538  allows the user interface  2516  and the user interface PCB  2538  to be modular and replaceable. Particularly, if necessary a user can disconnect the user interface PCB  2538  and the user interface  2516  from the potted power converter board assembly  2540  and replace them. For example, a user may wish to replace the user interface  2516  with a capacitive touch screen if desired. 
     The power PCB  2578  can also include a secondary low power output. The secondary low power output can include an internal power limit in the form of a positive temperature coefficient (“PTC”) thermistor that limits the outside power to the user interface PCB  2538  and drawn from the power PCB  2578 . Particularly, the PTC thermistor increases its resistance as its temperature increases and thus limits the power of the user interface PCB  2538 . For example, the PTC thermistor can be used to limit the secondary power to a predefined wattage (e.g., to less than or equal to 15 watts). 
       FIG. 149  is an exploded view of an alternative cord cover that includes a first cord cover half  2593 , a second cord cover half  2595 , a gasket  2597 , and a plurality of fasteners  2599  (e.g., screws). The first cord cover half  2593  includes a base  2593   a , a body  2593   b , an opening  2593   c , and a plurality of mounting brackets  2593   d . The body  2593   b  is connected to the base  2593   a  at a proximal end thereof, while the opening  2593   c  is generally a half-circle shape and positioned at a distal end of the body  2593   b . The first cord cover half  2593  is generally shaped and configured to house a portion of a male AC connector  2529  connected to the conduit  2528 . The second cord cover half  2595  is similar in construction to the first cord cover half  2593  and includes a base  2595   a , a body  2595   b , an opening  2595   c , and a plurality of mounting brackets  2595   d . The body  2595   b  is connected to the base  2595   a  at a proximal end thereof, while the opening  2595   c  is generally a half-circle shape and positioned at a distal end of the body  2595   b . The second cord cover half  2595  is generally shaped and configured to house a portion of the male AC connector  2529  connected to the conduit  2528 . The first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595  are configured to be complementary to one another such that they can be connected with the bases  2593   a ,  2595   a , the bodies  2593   b ,  2595   b , and the holes  2593   c ,  2595   c  adjacent to one another, and with the plurality of mounting brackets  2593   d ,  2595   d  overlapping. The first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595  can be interconnected, e.g., by a snap-fit connection or utilizing locking tabs, with the male AC connector  2529  housed within the bodies  2593   b ,  2595   b  thereof and the conduit  2528  positioned within the openings  2593   c ,  2595   c.    
     The gasket  2597  includes an annular body  2597   a  that defines a central opening  2597   b . The male AC connector  2529  can be inserted into the opening  2597   b  so that the male AC connector  2529  can be connected to the AC power input connector  2524  with the gasket  2597  surrounding the male AC connector  2529 . Once the male AC connector  2529  is inserted into the opening  2597   b , the first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595  can be connected around the male AC connector  2529  and the conduit  2528 , and the male AC connector  2529  can be inserted into the AC power input connector  2524 . The gasket  2597  can then be seated in the bases  2593   a ,  2595   a  of the first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595 . The first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595  can then be secured to, for example, an extended portion of the AC power input connector  2524  that is configured to receive the fasteners  2599 . Specifically, the fasteners  2599  can extend through the plurality of mounting brackets  2593   d ,  2595   d  of the first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595 , which are overlapped, and engage the extended portion of the AC power input connector  2524 , which can have, for example, complementary threaded holes. Alternatively, instead of the AC power input connector  2524  being extended, the contoured tray  2576  or the rear housing  2520  can be configured to have the first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595  secured thereto. When the first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595  are secured to the extended portion of the AC power input connector  2524  by the fasteners  2599 , the gasket  2597  is in engagement with a face of the AC power input connector  2524 , and is compressed between the face of the AC power input connector  2524  and the bases  2593   a ,  2595   a  of the first and second cord cover halves  2593 ,  2595 . Continued tightening of the fasteners  2599  will further compress the gasket  2597 . The gasket  2597  will be compressed between the AC power input connector  2524 , the bases  2593   a ,  2595   a , and the male AC connector  2529 , thus generating a water-tight seal that prevents water from entering the AC power input connector  2524 . 
     The potted power converter board assembly  2540  is secured between the front housing  2514  and the rear housing  2520 .  FIGS. 153-155  are respectively perspective, front, and rear views of the rear housing  2520 . The rear housing  2520  includes a rear wall  2614  and a sidewall  2616  extending about the perimeter of the rear wall  2614 . The rear wall  2614  and the sidewall  2616  define an internal chamber  2618 . A plurality of mounting bosses  2620  extend from the rear wall  2614  into the internal chamber  2618  and are configured to engage the mounting brackets  2592  of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  and secure to the front housing  2514 , thus securing the potted power converter board assembly  2540  between the front housing  2514  and the rear housing  2520 . The rear wall  2614  includes a handle recess  2622  that is generally positioned at an upper portion of the rear wall  2614  and extends into the internal chamber  2618 . The handle recess  2622  defines a handle chamber  2624  that allows a user to insert their hand into and hold the power supply  2512 . The rear wall  2614  additionally includes a fan opening  2626 , first and second kickstand engagement openings  2628   a ,  2628   b , first and second kickstand engagements  2630 , first and second wall mounts  2632   a ,  2632   b , and first and second abutments  2634   a ,  2634   b . The first and second kickstand engagements  2612  are identical in construction and are each positioned adjacent one of the first and second kickstand engagement openings  2628   a ,  2628   b  and extend into the internal chamber  2618  of the rear housing  608 . 
     The sidewall  2616  includes first and second cutouts  2636 ,  2638 . The first cutout  2636  is configured to receive the female power and communication output port  2522  of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  while the second cutout  2638  is configured to receive the AC power input connector  2524  of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  when the potted power converter board assembly  2540  is secured between the front housing  2514  and the rear housing  2520 . In this regard, the rear housing  2520  can be secured to the front housing  2514  by a plurality of fasteners  2544  (see  FIG. 144 ), e.g., screws, that can extend through the plurality of mounting bosses  2620 . 
     The rear housing  2520  also includes a plurality of top vents  2640  and a plurality of bottom drain holes  2642 . The top vents  2640  are positioned generally in the sidewall  2616  and on opposite sides of the handle recess  2622  that vent air from the power supply  2512 . Particularly, the top vents  2640  are positioned such that they vent air away from the handle recess  2622 , and thus away from a user&#39;s hand. The drain holes  2642  are generally positioned at a bottom of the rear housing  2520  and allow water to drain from the power supply  2512 . 
       FIGS. 156-160  show one of the kickstand engagements  2630  in greater detail.  FIG. 156  is an enlarged view of Area  156  of  FIG. 153  showing the kickstand engagement  2630  in greater detail.  FIG. 157  is a sectional view of the rear housing  2520  taken along line  157 - 157  of  FIG. 154 , and  FIG. 158  is an enlarged view of Area  158  of  FIG. 157 .  FIGS. 159 and 160  are respectively rear perspective and front perspective views of the enlarged Area of  FIG. 158 . As referenced above, the first and second kickstand engagements  2630  are each positioned adjacent one of the first and second kickstand engagement openings  2628   a ,  2628   b  and extend into the internal chamber  2618  of the rear housing  608 . The kickstand engagement  2630  includes a lower abutment  2644  and an upper abutment  2646 . 
     The lower abutment  2644  includes first and second curved supports  2648   a ,  2648   b  that are positioned on opposite sides of a channel  2650 , a stop  2652  extending between the first and second curved supports  2648   a ,  2648   b , and a protrusion  2654  extending upwardly adjacent the channel  2650  and between the first and second curved supports  2648   a ,  2648   b . The first and second curved supports  2648   a ,  2648   b  each include a curved portion  2656   a ,  2656   b  and a sidewall  2658   a ,  2658   b  on the opposite side of the channel  2650 . The first and second curved supports  2648   a ,  2648   b  extend inward from the rear wall  2614 , e.g., into the inner chamber  2618 , and the respective curved portions  2656   a ,  2656   b  are approximately one-quarter circle curves. The lower abutment  2644  generally defines a support chamber  2660 . 
     The upper abutment  2646  includes a curved body  2662  that curves from an attachment end  2664  to an open end  2666 . The curved body  2662  is connected to the rear wall  2614  at the attached end  2664  and curves inward from the rear wall  2614 , e.g., into the inner chamber  2618 , and back toward to the first kickstand engagement opening  2628   a . The curved body  2662  defines an engagement chamber  2668  and includes an angled stop  2670  extending from the curved body  2662  into the engagement chamber  2658 . 
       FIGS. 161-164  show the kickstand  2530  in greater detail.  FIGS. 161 and 162  are perspective and front views of the kickstand  2530 , respectively. The kickstand  2530  includes a first leg  2672   a , a second leg  2672   b , and a cross-bar  2674  extending between the first and second legs  2672   a ,  2672   b  to form a horseshoe-like shape. The first leg  2672   a  has a first end  2676   a  and a second end  2678   a , and the second leg  2672   b  has a first end  2676   a  and a second end  2678   b . The cross-bar  2674  extends between the second ends  2678   a ,  2678   b  of the first and second legs  2672   a ,  2672   b . The first and second legs  2672   a ,  2674   b  each include a locking protrusion  2680  extending from the first end  2676   a ,  2676   b  thereof. The locking protrusions  2680  are configured to engage the kickstand engagements  2630 . Each of the first ends  2676   a ,  2676   b  of the first and second legs  2672   a ,  2672   b  also include an engagement surface  2682  that is configured to engage the curved body  2662  of the upper abutments  2646 , which is discussed in greater detail below. 
       FIGS. 163 and 164  are respectively bottom perspective and top perspective views of one of the locking protrusions  2680  showing the locking protrusion  2680  in greater detail. The locking protrusion  2680  includes a body  2684  extending between first and second sidewalls  2686   a ,  2686   b , and an angled extension  2688  extending from the body  2684  at a downward angle and positioned between the first and second curved sidewalls  2686   a ,  2686   b . The first and second sidewalls  2686   a ,  2686   b  each include a curved portion  2690   a ,  2690   b . The locking protrusion  2680  is configured to fit into the support chamber  2660  of the kickstand engagement&#39;s lower abutment  2644 , with the angled extension  2688  sized and configured to be positioned within the channel  2650 . 
       FIGS. 165-169  illustrate the engagement of the locking protrusion  2680  with the kickstand engagement  2630  in greater detail.  FIG. 165  is a perspective view of the locking protrusion  2680  engaged with the kickstand engagement  2630  in a closed position, e.g., the kickstand  2530  is closed, while  FIG. 166  is a perspective view of the locking protrusion  2680  engaged with the kickstand engagement  2630  in an open position, e.g., the kickstand  2530  is open.  FIG. 167  is a sectional view taken along line  167 - 167  of  FIG. 140  showing the kickstand  2530  attached to the rear housing  2520  and in a closed position.  FIG. 168  is a sectional view taken along line  168 - 168  of  FIG. 143  showing the kickstand  2530  attached to the rear housing  2520  and in an open position.  FIG. 169  is an enlarged view of Area  169  of  FIG. 168 . When the locking protrusion  2680  is engaged with the kickstand engagement  2630 , the body  2684  is positioned within the support chamber  2660 , the first and second curved sidewalls  2686   a ,  2686   b  of the locking protrusion  2680  are adjacent the first and second sidewalls  2658   a ,  2658   b  of the lower abutment  2644 , respectively, and the angled extension  2688  is positioned within the channel  2650 . In this position, the protrusion  2654  of the lower abutment  2644  engages an underside of the body  2684  of the locking protrusion  2680 , and the open end  2666  of the upper abutment  2646  contacts a topside of the body  2684  to prevent the locking protrusion  2654  from being inadvertently pulled out from the lower abutment  2644 . The first and second sidewalls  2658   a ,  2658   b  of the lower abutment  2644  prevent the locking protrusion  2680 , and thus the kickstand itself  2530 , from shifting laterally. The curvature of the first and second curved sidewalls  2686   a ,  2686   b  generally matches the curvature of the curved portions  2656   a ,  2656   b  of the first and second curved supports  2648   a ,  2648   b . Accordingly, the locking protrusion  2680  can rotate within the lower support chamber  2660  of the lower abutment  2644  with the first and second curved sidewalls  2686   a ,  2686   b  riding against the curved portions  2656   a ,  2656   b  and the angled extension  2688  rotating within the channel  2650 . 
     To engage the kickstand  2530  with the rear housing  2520 , a user simply inserts the locking protrusions  2680  of the kickstand  2530  into the first and second kickstand engagement openings  2628   a ,  2628   b  and applies pressure causing the locking protrusions  2680  to engage the kickstand engagements  2630 . The curved body  2662  engages the protrusion  2654  of the lower abutment  2644  and the open end  2666  of the upper abutment  2646 , which causes the curved body  2662  of the upper abutment  2646  to compress and allow the curved body  2662  to enter the support chamber  2660  of the lower abutment  2644 . Once the curved body  2662  is positioned within the support chamber  2660 , the curved body  2662  decompresses and returns to its original position and engages a top portion of the curved body  2662  to retain the curved body  2662  within the support chamber  2660  and in engagement with the lower abutment  2644 , as shown in  FIGS. 165 and 167 . Thus, the locking protrusions  2680  are engaged with the kickstand engagements  2630 . Accordingly, no additional fasteners are required to secure the kickstand  2530  to the rear housing  2520 . 
     Once the kickstand  2530  is secured to the rear housing  2520  and the locking protrusions  2680  are engaged with the kickstand engagements  2630 , the kickstand  2530  can be rotated into an open position whereby it is rotated about the locking protrusions  2680 , which rotate within the lower abutments  2644 . When in an open position, the kickstand  2530  is prevented from opening too far by the kickstand engagements  2630 . Specifically, as the kickstand  2530  rotates about the locking protrusions  2680 , the angled extension  2688  will rotate across the channel  2650  until it contacts the stop  2652  of the lower abutment  2644  while the engagement surface  2682  of the kickstand  2530  rotates through the engagement chamber  2668  of the upper abutment  2644  until it contacts the angled stop  2670  of the upper abutment  2644 . Engagement of the angled extension  2688  with the stop  2652  prevents the locking protrusions  2680  from rotating further. However, continued pressure on the kickstand  2530  in the open direction will result in the engagement surface  2682  of the kickstand  2530  to apply additional pressure against the angled stop  2670 . This additional pressure against the angled stop  2670  is transferred through the angled stop  2670  and into the curved body  2662  of the upper abutment  2644 , which causes the curved body  2662  to flex. Specifically, curved body  2662  flexes such that the open end  2666  is pressed into contact with a top portion of the body  2684  of the locking protrusion  2680 , which acts to further secure the locking protrusions  2680  within the kickstand engagements  2630 . This engagement ensures that when the kickstand  2530  is in an open position and the power supply  2512  is resting on the kickstand  2530 , the kickstand  2530  will not become detached due to additional force on the kickstand  2530 , e.g., a downward force on the power supply  2512 . 
       FIG. 170  is a partially exploded rear perspective view of the power supply  2512  with the fan  2532  and fan cover  2534  exploded. As discussed above in connection with  FIG. 153 , the rear housing  608  includes a fan opening  2626  that is configured to receive the fan  2532  and be covered by the fan cover  2534 . The fan  2532  can be positioned within the fan opening  2626  and in contact with the heatsink  2580  and potting compound  2582  of the potted power converter board assembly  2540  in order to cool the potted power converter board assembly  2540  through forced convection cooling. The fan  2532  is connected to and receives power from the fan low-power wires  2612 . The fan  2532  is secured in the fan opening  2626  by the fan cover  2534  and a plurality of fasteners  2692 . Particularly, the fan cover  2534  includes a body  2694 , a tab  2696 , and a mounting bracket  2698 . The body  2694  of the fan cover  2534  can include vent openings  2700  and a plurality of mounting holes  2702 . When the fan  2532  is positioned within the fan opening  2626 , the fan cover  2534  can be positioned over the fan  2532  such that the tab  2696  is inserted into the fan opening  2626  and in engagement with the rear housing  2520 , and the mounting bracket  2698  is positioned in a rear recess  2704  on the rear housing  2520  adjacent the fan opening  2626 . The fan cover  2534  can be secured to the rear housing  2520  by a fastener  2692  that can extend through the mounting bracket  2698  and engage the rear recess  2704  of the rear housing  2520 . The fan cover  2534  can also be secured to the fan  2532  by a plurality of fasteners  2692  that can extend through the mounting holes  2702  of the fan body  2694  and engage mounting supports  2706  of the fan  2532 . 
     The fan  2532  can be removed and replaced by simply removing the fasteners  2692 , removing the fan cover  2534 , and removing the fan  2532  from the rear housing  2520 . The fan low-power wires  2612  can be cut and connected to a replacement fan, which can be inserted into the fan opening  2626  and secured in place by the fan cover  2534 . By using forced convection cooling instead of simply relying on heat dissipation through heatsinks, the overall package size of the power supply  2512  can be reduced. 
       FIGS. 171-213  are directed to a pool cleaner caddy  2708  of the present disclosure.  FIGS. 171-177  are respectively perspective, side, rear, front, top, and bottom views of the pool cleaner caddy  2708 . The pool cleaner caddy  2708  is generally used to support a pool cleaner, e.g., the pool cleaners  100 ,  700 ,  800  of the present disclosure, and a power supply, e.g., power supply  2512  of the present disclosure, so that they can be transported to a desired location. The pool cleaner caddy  2708  generally includes a base  2710 , a first wheel assembly  2712   a , a second wheel assembly  2712   b , a stem  2713  that can include a lower stem portion  2714  and an upper stem portion  2716 , a handle assembly  2718 , and a ribbed fastener  2719 .  FIGS. 177 and 178  are respectively exploded perspective and exploded rear views of the pool cleaner caddy  2708 . As shown in  FIGS. 177 and 178 , the first and second wheel assemblies  2712   a ,  2712   b  each include a wheel  2720 , an axle  2722 , an axle receiver  2724 , and a screw  2726 . 
       FIGS. 179-182  show the base  2710  in greater detail. Particularly,  FIGS. 179-182  are respectively perspective, front, top, and bottom views of the base  2710 . The base  2710  is generally shaped and sized to support a pool cleaner, e.g., the pool cleaners  100 ,  700 ,  800  of the present disclosure, positioned thereon. The base  2710  includes a rear wall  2728 , a left side wall  2730 , a right side wall  2732 , a front curved wall  2734 , a left bottom wall  2736 , a first center bottom wall  2738 , a second center bottom wall  2740 , and a right bottom wall  2742 . The rear wall  2728  includes an angled extension  2744  and a channel  2746  at a center thereof. The angled extension  2744  extends rearwardly from the rear wall  2728  and the channel  2746  extends longitudinally along the length of the angled extension  2744  and through the rear wall  2728 . The channel  2746  includes first and second transverse openings  2748 ,  2750  and first and second angled locking tabs  2752 ,  2754  on lateral sides of the first transverse opening  2748 . The channel  2746  is sized and configured to receive the lower stem portion  2714 . The second transverse opening  2750 , and first and second angled locking tabs  2752 ,  2754  are utilized to lock the lower stem portion  2714  in place, which is discussed in greater detail below. 
     The left bottom wall  2736  is positioned adjacent the left side wall  2730  and extends from the rear wall  2728  to the front curved wall  2734 . The right bottom wall  2742  is positioned adjacent the right side wall  2732  and extends from the rear wall  2728  to the front curved wall  2734 . A left catch  2756  extends upward from the left bottom wall  2736  and the left side wall  2730 , while a right catch  2758  extends upward from the right bottom wall  2742  and the right side wall  2732 . The left and right catches  2756   2758  are curved protrusions that are each configured to engage a wheel of a pool cleaner, e.g., the pool cleaners  100 ,  700 ,  800  of the present disclosure, positioned on the pool cleaner caddy  2708  to prevent the pool cleaner from falling off of the pool cleaner caddy  2708 . For example, if the pool cleaner caddy  2708  were to be tilted too far forward, the left and right catches  2756  would catch on the wheels, e.g., the rear wheels, of the pool cleaner and prevent the pool cleaner from falling off of the pool cleaner caddy  2708  and being potentially damaged. The first and second center bottom walls  2738 ,  2740  are positioned on opposite sides of the channel  2746  and extend from the rear wall  2728  to the front curved wall  2734 . 
     The base  2710  additionally includes a left bottom opening  2760  formed between the left bottom wall  2736  and the first center bottom wall  2738 , a right bottom opening  2762  formed between the right bottom wall  2742  and the second center bottom wall  2740 , and a center bottom opening  2764  formed between the first and second center bottom walls  2738 ,  2740 . The front curved wall  2734  also includes a front opening  2766 . The left bottom opening  2760 , the right bottom opening  2762 , the center bottom opening  2764 , and the front opening  2766  allow for water to be drawn from the base  2710 . 
     A center cleaner support  2768  extends between the first and second center bottom walls  2738 ,  2740  and across the center bottom opening  2764 . The center cleaner support  2768  includes an elongated rectangular base  2770  having a top surface  2772  and a bottom surface  2774 , and an angled protrusion  2776  extending from the top surface  2772  of the rectangular base  2770 . The elongated rectangular base  2770  also includes a semi-circular recess  2778  in the bottom surface  2774  thereof. The angled protrusion  2776  can be sized and configured to be inserted into and close an inlet bottom of a pool cleaner, e.g., the inlet bottom  822  of the pool cleaner  800  (see  FIG. 57 ) of the present disclosure, when the pool cleaner is placed on the base  2710 , which prevents animals and insects from entering the pool cleaner. A front cleaner support  2780  is positioned on the base  2710  at a front end  2782  of the center bottom opening  2764 , and between the center bottom opening  2764  and the front curved wall  2734 . The front cleaner support  2780  includes a support base  2784  having an upper surface  2786 , and a projection  2788  extending from the upper surface  2786  of the support base  2784 . The front cleaner support  2780  is configured to engage a recess on a pool cleaner, e.g., the recess  830  on the chassis  806  of the pool cleaner  800  (see  FIG. 57 ) of the present disclosure. When the pool cleaner  800  is positioned on the base  2710  it is supported by the center cleaner support  2768  and the front cleaner support  2780 , which respectively engage the inlet bottom  822  and the recess  830 . The center cleaner support  2768  and the front cleaner support  2780  prevent the pool cleaner  800  from lateral and longitudinal movement and elevate the wheels  818   a - 818   e  of the pool cleaner  800  from the let and right bottom walls  2736 ,  2742 , and the rollers  820   a - 820   e  of the pool cleaner  800  from the front curved wall  2734  and the first and second center bottom walls  2738 ,  2740 . By doing so, permanent deformation of the wheels  818   a - 818   e  and the rollers  820   a - 820   f  due to creep is prevented. 
     The base  2770  additionally includes a stem locking bracket  2790  positioned at the front end  2782  of the center bottom opening  2764 . The stem locking bracket  2790  includes a body  2792  extending between the first and second center bottom walls  2738 ,  2740 , a center arch  2794  that curves upwards from the body  2792  and defines a channel  2796 , and angled transitions  2797   a ,  2797   b  connecting the center arch  2794  and the body  2792 . The center arch  2794  and the channel  2796  are configured to receive a portion of the lower stem portion  2714 . The center arch  2794  also includes a transverse opening  2798  extending across the center arch  2794 , which is utilized to lock the lower stem portion  2714  in place, which is discussed in greater detail below. 
     Also included on the base  2710  are a left side wheel housing  2800  and a right side wheel housing  2802 . The left side wheel housing  2800  is positioned adjacent the left side wall  2730 , while the right side wheel housing  2802  is positioned adjacent the right side wall  2732 . The left side wheel housing  2800  includes an outer wall  2804 , an inner wall  2806  spaced from the outer wall  2804 , and a wheel chamber  2808  between the outer wall  2804  and the inner wall  2806 . Similarly, the right side wheel housing  2802  includes and outer wall  2810 , and inner wall  2812  spaced from the outer wall  2810 , and a wheel chamber  2814  between the outer wall  2810  and the inner wall  2812 . The wheel chambers  2808 ,  2814  are sized and configured to each receive one of the wheels  2720 . The outer walls  2804 ,  2810  each include an outer mounting boss  2816 ,  2818 , respectively, while the inner walls  2806 ,  2806  each include a keyed opening  2820 ,  2822  (see, e.g.,  FIG. 177 ), respectively. The outer mounting bosses  2816 ,  2818  are substantially similar in construction, and accordingly any description of one of the mounting bosses  2816 ,  2818  should be understood to apply to the other mounting boss  2816 ,  2818 . Likewise, the keyed openings  2820 ,  2822  are substantially similar in construction, and accordingly any description of one of the keyed openings  2820 ,  2822  should be understood to apply to the other keyed opening  2820 ,  2822 . 
       FIG. 183  is an enlarged perspective view of Area  183  of  FIG. 179  showing the left side wheel housing  2800  and the mounting boss  2816  in greater detail.  FIG. 184  is an enlarged top view of Area  184  of  FIG. 181  showing the mounting boss  2816  in greater detail. The mounting boss  2816  includes a central opening  2824  extending through the outer wall  2804 , a first half  2826 , and a second half  2828 . The first half  2826  and the second half  2828  surround the central opening  2824  and are divided by a first angled channel  2830  and a second angled channel  2832 . The first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832  are formed at an angle α with respect to the outer wall  2804 . Angle α can be an angle greater than 0° and less than 90°. In some aspects of the present disclosure the angle α is 40°.  FIG. 185  is a perspective view of the left side wheel housing  2800  from a right side thereof showing the keyed opening  2820  in greater detail. The keyed opening  2820  is a generally circular opening that extends through the inner wall  2806  and includes first and second inward extensions  2834 ,  2836  that extend radially inward. 
       FIGS. 186-188  are respectively perspective, top, and bottom views of the axle  2722  of the present disclosure. The axle  2722  includes a body  2838  having a distal end  2840  and a proximal end  2842 , an enlarged head  2844 , and a cap  2846 . The enlarged head  2844  is coaxial with and connected to the proximal end  2842  of the body  2838 , and has a slightly larger diameter than the body  2838 . The cap  2846  is coaxial with and connected to the enlarged head  2844 , and has a slightly larger diameter than the enlarged head  2844 . The enlarged head  2844  includes first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  that extend from the cap  2846  and along the enlarged head  2844  at an angle α. That is, the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  are at the same angle α as the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832  of the mounting bosses  2816 ,  2818 . The first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  can be left-handed threads. The first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  are also sized and configured to be inserted into the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832 . The body  2838  generally tapers between first and second flat portions that are respectively adjacent the proximal end  2842  and the distal end  2840 . The distal end  2840  of the body  2838  includes a plurality of notches  2852 ,  2854 . 
       FIGS. 189-192  are respectively perspective, front, rear, and side views of the axle receiver  2724  of the present disclosure. The axle receiver  2724  includes a cylindrical body  2856 , a first upper radial extension  2858 , a second upper radial extension  2860 , a first middle radial extension  2862 , a second middle radial extension  2864 , and an annular boss  2866 . The cylindrical body  2856  defines an inner chamber  2868 , and includes a proximal end  2870  having a hole  2872  extending through to the inner chamber  2868  and an open distal end  2874 . The annular boss  2866  extends from the proximal end  2870  of the cylindrical body  2856  about the hole  2872 . The first and second upper radial extensions  2858 ,  2860  extend radially outward from the proximal end  2870  of the cylindrical body  2856  and are diametrically opposed. The first and second middle radial extensions  2862 ,  2864  extend radially outward from the cylindrical body  2856 , e.g., at a position that is between the proximal end  2870  and the distal end  2874 , are diametrically opposed, and are spaced radially from the first and second upper radial extensions  2858 ,  2860 . The cylindrical body  2856  additionally includes first and second locking assemblies  2876 ,  2878  that are positioned in the inner chamber  2868  on an inner wall  2880  of the proximal end  2870  of the cylindrical body  2856 . The first and second locking assemblies  2876 ,  2878  each include a ramped protrusion  2882 , a block protrusion  2884 , and an indentation  2886  between the ramped protrusion  2882  and the block protrusion  2884 . The first and second locking assemblies  2876 ,  2878  are configured to engage the notches  2852 ,  2854  on the distal end  2840  of the axle  2722  and further secure the axle  2722  with the axle receiver  2724 . The cylindrical body  2874  is sized and configured to be inserted into the keyed opening  2820  such that when it is inserted it can be rotated so that the first and second middle radial extensions  2862 ,  2864  overlap the first and second inward extensions  2834 ,  2836  and the first and second upper radial extensions  2858 ,  2860  extend beyond the keyed opening  2820  and overlap the inner wall  2806 , thus securing the axle receiver  2724  to the inner wall  2806 . 
       FIG. 193  is a perspective view of the wheel  2720  of the present disclosure. The wheel  2720  includes a central hub  2888 , a rim  2890 , a plurality of spokes  2892  extending from the central hub  2888  to the rim  2890 , and a tire  2894 .  FIG. 194  is a sectional view of the wheel  2720  of  FIG. 193  taken along line  194 - 194 . The central hub  2888  is a generally tubular component that includes an outer boss  2896  having an opening  2898 , an inner boss  2900  having an opening  2902 , and a central chamber  2904  extending across the length of the central hub  2888  and from the opening  2898  of the outer boss  2896  to the opening  2902  of the inner boss  2900 . The central chamber  2904  can be tapered to match the taper of the body  2838  of the axle  2722  so that the axle  2722  can only be inserted into the central hub  2888  in a single direction. 
       FIGS. 195-199  show the first wheel assembly  2712   a  connected with the left side wheel housing  2800  of the base  2710 .  FIG. 195  is an enlarged view of Area  195  of  FIG. 174 .  FIG. 196  is a partial sectional view taken along line  196 - 196  of  FIG. 175 .  FIG. 197  is an enlarged perspective view of Area  197  of  FIG. 171  showing the connection of the axle  2722  with the outer mounting boss  2816  of the left side wheel housing  2800  outer wall  2804  in greater detail.  FIG. 198  is an enlarged view of Area  198  of  FIG. 175  showing the connection of the axle  2722  with the outer mounting boss  2816  of the left side wheel housing  2800  outer wall  2804  in greater detail.  FIG. 199  is a partial side view in the direction of arrows  199 - 199  of  FIG. 173  showing the connection of the axle receiver  2724  with the inner wall  2806 . To connect the first wheel assembly  2712   a  with the left side wheel housing  2800  of the base  2710 , a user first places the wheel  2720  in the wheel chamber  2808  of the left side wheel housing  2800 . The user then inserts the axle  2722  through the outer mounting boss  2816  of the left side wheel housing  2800  outer wall  2804 , and through the opening  2898  of the central hub  2888  outer boss  2896 . Next, the user aligns the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  of the axle  2722  with the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832  of the outer mounting boss  2816  and rotates the axle  2722  counter-clockwise to set the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  in the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832 . Engagement of the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  with the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832  is shown in, for example,  FIGS. 197 and 198 . 
     The user then inserts the axle receiver  2724  into the keyed opening  2820  of the inner wall  2806  so that the first and second middle radial extensions  2862 ,  2864  are inserted through the keyed opening  2820  and the first and second upper radial extensions  2858 ,  2860  are adjacent the inner wall  2806  (see  FIG. 195 ). In doing so, the user will also ensure that the distal end  2840  of the axle  2722  is inserted into the open distal end  2874  of the axle receiver  2724  and placed in the inner chamber  2862  thereof. Once inserted, the user rotates the axle receiver  2724  to align and overlap the first and second middle radial extensions  2862 ,  2864  with the first and second inward extensions  2834 ,  2836  and substantially cover the remainder of the keyed opening  2820  with the first and second upper radial extensions  2858 ,  2860  (see  FIG. 199 ), thus securing the axle receiver  2724  to the inner wall  2806 . The user then engages a screw  2726  with the hole  2872  of the axle receiver  2724  and a hole  2906  in the distal end  2840  of the axle  2722  and tightens the screw  2726 . The hole  2872  of the axle receiver  2724  and the hole  2906  of the axle  2722  can be self-threading. 
     As the user tightens the screw  2726 , the axle  2722  and the axle receiver  2724  are drawn together. This additionally causes the notches  2852 ,  2854  of the axle receiver  2724  to engage the locking assemblies  2876 ,  2878  of the axle receiver  2724 . Particularly, each of the notches  2852 ,  2854  are rotated along one of the ramped protrusions  2882  and then seated in an indentation  2886  against one of the block protrusions  2884 . This causes the distal end  2840  of the axle  2722  to wedge against the interior of the cylindrical body  2856  (e.g., with the inner chamber  2868 ) of the axle receiver  2724 , further securing the axle  2722  and the axle receiver  2724 . Additionally, since the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  of the axle  2722  are angled in the same rotational direction that the screw  2726  is rotated it, e.g., the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  are left-handed threads while the screw  2726  includes right-handed threads, tightening of the screw  2726  causes the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  to more tightly engage the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832 . When the screw  2726  is fully engaged it is positioned within the annular boss  2866  of the axle receiver  2724 . 
     Furthermore, the first wheel assembly  2712   a  is configured and designed such that if the outer wall  2804  of the left side wheel housing  2800  were to be deflected inward it could not be deflected enough to disengage the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  from the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832 . Particularly, as shown in  FIGS. 195 and 196 , the width of the outer mounting boss  2816  is greater than the space between the outer wall  2804  and the central hub  2888 . Accordingly, if the outer wall  2804  were to deflect inward, e.g., toward the inner wall  2806 , it would contact the central hub  2888 , which in turn would contact the axle receiver  2724 , and be prevented from separating from the axle  2722  prior to the first and second angled threads  2848 ,  2850  becoming disengaged from the first and second angled channels  2830 ,  2832 . Furthermore and as discussed above, the inner wall  2806  is prevented from deflecting due to engagement with the axle receiver  2724 . 
     It should be understood that the description provided above in connection with the first wheel assembly  2712   a  holds true for the second wheel assembly  2712   b  since the first and second wheel assemblies  2712   a ,  2712   b  have substantially similar constructions, but on opposite sides of the base  2710 . 
       FIGS. 200 and 201  are first and second perspective views of the stem  2713 , which can include a lower stem portion  2714  and the upper stem portion  2716 . The stem  2713  can be a single component or it can comprise multiple separate pieces, e.g., the lower stem portion  2714  and the upper stem portion  2716 , that can be interconnected. The lower stem portion  2714  includes a craned body  2908  having a lower section  2910 , a middle section  2912 , and an upper section  2914 , a first snap lock  2916  (e.g., a button snap), and a second snap lock  2918  (e.g., a button snap). The craned body  2908  is a hollow tubular component that extends from a first end  2920  at the lower section  2910  to a second end  2922  at the upper section  2914 . The craned body  2908  generally curves upward from the lower section  2910  to the upper section  2914 . The lower section  2910  and the upper section  2914  each include a through-hole  2924 ,  2926  generally adjacent the first end  2920  and the second end  2922 , respectively. The middle section  2912  also includes a through-hole  2928  generally at the center thereof. The first and second snap locks  2916 ,  2918  can be leaf springs that can be respectively positioned within the first and second ends  2920 ,  2922  of the craned body  2908 . The first snap lock  2916  can include first and second outward protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b  that can be engaged with and extend out from the through-hole  2924  when the first snap lock  2916  is positioned within the first end  2920  of the craned body  2908 . Similarly, the second snap lock  2918  can include first and second outward protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b  that can be engaged with and extend out from the through-hole  2926  when the second snap lock  2918  is positioned within the second end  2922  of the craned body  2908 . The first and second snap locks  2916 ,  2918  can be compressed by applying pressure to the respective outward protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b ,  2932   a ,  2932   b  thereof. Upon release of the pressure, the first and second snap locks  2916 ,  2918  will return to their original positions with the outward protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b ,  2932   a ,  2932   b  extending out from the through-holes  2924 ,  2926 . 
     The upper stem portion  2716  includes a kinked body  2934  having a lower section  2936 , a middle section  2938 , and an upper section  2940 , and a third snap lock  2942  (e.g., a button snap). The kinked body  2934  is a hollow tubular component that extends from an enlarged first end  2944  to a second end  2946 . The lower section  2936  includes a through-hole  2948  that is positioned at, and extends through, the enlarged first end  2944 . The upper section  2940  includes a through-hole  2950  that is positioned offset from the second end  2946 , and a key-slot  2952  positioned at the second end  2946 . The third snap lock  2942  can include first and second outward protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  that can be engaged with and extend out from the through-hole  2950  when the third snap lock  2942  is positioned within the second end  2946  of the kinked body  2934 . The third snap lock  2942  is identical in construction to the first and second snap locks  2916 ,  2918 , and can be compressed by applying pressure to the outward protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b . Upon release of the pressure, the third snap lock  2942  will return to its original position with the outward protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  extending out from the through-hole  2950 . The enlarged first end  2944  of the upper stem portion  2716  is sized and configured to be placed over the second end  2922  of the lower stem portion  2714 , e.g., the second end  2922  of the lower stem portion  2714  is inserted into the enlarged first end  2944  of the upper stem portion  2716 , to engage and depress the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b  of the second snap lock  2918 . When second end  2922  of the lower stem portion  2714  is inserted into the enlarged first end  2944  of the upper stem portion  2716  and the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b  are depressed, the through hole  2948  of the enlarged first end  2944  can be aligned with the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b . Upon alignment, the second snap lock  2918  will snap back to its original position and the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b  will extend out from both the through-hole  2926  of the lower stem portion  2714  and the through hole  2948  of the enlarged first end  2944  of the upper stem portion  2716 , thus securing the lower stem portion  2714  and the upper stem portion  2716  together. 
       FIGS. 202-207  show the handle assembly  2718  of the present disclosure in greater detail. Particularly,  FIGS. 202-207  are perspective, exploded, front, rear, side, and top views of the handle assembly  2718 , respectively. The handle assembly  2718  includes a front shell  2956 , a rear shell  2958 , and a plurality of screws  2960 . The front shell  2956  includes a front bottom support half  2962 , first and second front side supports halves  2964 ,  2966 , a front top handle half  2968 , a front tray  2970 , and a first rear support wall  2972 . The first and second front side supports halves  2964 ,  2966  extend upwardly from opposite sides of the front bottom support half  2962  and connect with the front top handle half  2968 , which is tilted slightly forward from the first and second front side support halves  2964 ,  2966 . The front bottom support half  2962 , first and second front side support halves  2964 ,  2966 , and front top handle half  2968  define a window  2974 . The front tray  2970  extends rearward from the front bottom support half  2962 . The first rear support wall  2972  includes first and second flexible locking tabs  2976   a ,  2976   b  and extends upward from the end of the front tray  2970  spaced from the front bottom support half  2962 . 
     The rear shell  2958  includes a rear bottom support half  2978 , first and second rear side support halves  2980 ,  2982 , a rear top handle half  2984 , a rear base  2986 , a second rear support wall  2988 , and a mount  2990 . The first and second rear side supports halves  2980 ,  2982  extend upwardly from opposite sides of the rear bottom support half  2978  and connect with the rear top handle half  2984 , which is tilted slightly forward from the first and second rear side support halves  2980 ,  2982 . The rear bottom support half  2978 , first and second rear side support halves  2980 ,  2982 , and rear top handle half  2984  define a window  2992  and are configured to engage the front bottom support half  2962 , first and second front side support halves  2964 ,  2966 , and front top handle half  2968 , respectively, to form a complete frame with the two windows  2974 ,  2992  aligned. 
     The rear base  2986  extends rearward from the rear bottom support half  2978  and includes a left tray  2994 , a right tray  2996 , a left sidewall  2998 , a right sidewall  3000 , and a recess  3002  formed between the left tray  2994  and the right tray  2996 . The recess  3002  is sized and configured to receive the front tray  2970  of the front shell  2956 , which when connected can form a single surface between the left tray  2994  and right tray  2996  of the rear base  2986  and the front tray  2970  of the front shell  2956 . A rear tray  3004  extends rearward from the rear base  2986 , and the second rear support wall  2988  extends upward from the end of the rear tray  3004  spaced from the rear base  2986 . The mount  2990  extends from the rear base  2986  generally downward and rearward. The mount  2990  is a generally tubular hollow extension that includes a through-hole  3006  and can also include an internal key  3008  that is configured to mate with clearance to the key-slot  2952 . The mount  2990  is sized and configured to have the second end  2946  of the upper stem portion  2716  inserted therein and to engage and depress the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  of the third snap lock  2942 . When the second end  2946  of the upper stem portion  2716  and the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  are depressed, the internal key  3008  can be aligned with and inserted into the key-slot  2952  while the through-hole  3006  of the mount  2990  can be aligned with the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b . Upon alignment, the third snap lock  2942  will snap back to its original position and the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  will extend out from both the through-hole  2948  of the upper stem portion  2716  and the through hole  3006  of the mount  2990  of the handle assembly  2718 , thus securing the handle assembly  2718  and the upper stem portion  2716  together. Additionally, engagement of the internal key  3008  with the key-slot  2952  ensures that the handle assembly  2718  is engaged with the handle assembly  2718  in the proper configuration. 
     As user can interconnect the front shell  2956  and the rear shell  2958  by inserting the front tray  2970  into the recess  3002  and engaging the front bottom support half  2962 , first and second front side support halves  2964 ,  2966 , and front top handle half  2968  with the rear bottom support half  2978 , first and second rear side support halves  2980 ,  2982 , and rear top handle half  2984 , respectively. The front shell  2956  and the rear shell  2958  can then secured to one another by the screws  2960 . When assembled, the handle assembly  2718  defines a power supply housing  3010  and a cable housing  3012 . The power supply housing  3010  is sized and configured to receive and hold a power supply, e.g., the power supply  2512  of the present disclosure. When the power supply  2512  is inserted into the power supply housing  3010 , it is retained in place by the front tray  2970 , the left sidewall  2998 , the right sidewall  3000 , the rear support wall  2972 , and first and second flanges  3014 ,  3016  that extend rearward from the first and second side support halves  2964 ,  2966 . Additionally, the first and second flexible locking tabs  2976   a ,  2976   b  engage the first and second abutments  2634   a ,  2634   b  of the power supply  2512  to further retain the power supply  2512  to the handle assembly  2718 . The handle assembly  2718  is configured such that if the pool cleaner caddy  2708  were to fall over and land on the handle assembly  2718 , the handle assembly  2718  would make contact with the ground first and absorb the majority of the impact instead of the power supply  2512 . Additionally, the first and second flexible locking tabs  2976   a ,  2976   b  would retain the power supply  2512  unless a sufficient amount of force resulted from the fall, in which case the first and second abutments  2634   a ,  2634   b  of the power supply  2512  would depress the flexible locking tabs  2976   a ,  2976   b  and allow the power supply  2512  to slide out from the handle assembly  2718  in a controlled fashion to reduce impact and potential damage. The cable housing  3012  is configured to receive a pool cleaner power cable, e.g., the power and control cable  2089  of the pool cleaner  800  of the present disclosure, and allow the power cable to be hanged on the rear tray  3004 . 
       FIGS. 208-213  illustrate the pool cleaner caddy  2708  in states of assembly.  FIGS. 208-210  are front perspective, rear perspective, and top views, respectively, showing the base  2710  with the first and second wheel assemblies  2712   a ,  2712   b  and the lower stem portion  2714  connected thereto. The first and second wheel assemblies  2712   a ,  2712   b  can be connected to the base  2710  as described above in connection with  FIGS. 195-199 . The first and second wheel assemblies  2712   a ,  2712   b  can either be attached to the base  2710  prior to any other components, or can be attached last after all other components have been attached. To connect the lower stem portion  2714  to the base  2710 , the user inserts the first end  2920  into the center bottom opening  2764  and under the center cleaner support  2768 , and aligns the first end  2920  with the channel  2796  of the stem locking bracket  2790 , the lower section  2910  with the semi-circular recess  2778  of the center cleaner support  2768 , and the middle section  2912  with the angled extension  2744  and channel  2746  of the base  2710 . The user then applies pressure to the first end  2920 , which can be in the form of pulling on the second end  2922  of the lower stem portion  2714  and using the angled extension  2744  and rear wall  2728  as a fulcrum, to force the first and second protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b  of the first snap lock  2916  to engage the angled transitions  2797   a ,  2797   b  of the stem locking bracket  2790 . This engagement causes the first and second protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b  to deflect inward, allowing the first end  2920  of the lower stem portion  2714  to be seated in the channel  2796  of the center arch  2794 . When the first end  2920  is fully seated in the channel  2796  the first and second protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b  will be aligned with the transverse opening  2798  and the first snap lock  2916  will return to its original position and the first and second protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b  will snap into the transverse opening  2798  where they will be in engagement with and secured to the stem locking bracket  2790 . This engagement secures the first end  2920  of the lower stem portion  2714  to the stem locking bracket  2790 . If a user desires to disconnect the lower stem portion  2714  they would simply depress the first and second protrusions  2930   a ,  2930   b  and pull the first end  2920  of the lower stem portion  2714  out from the stem locking bracket  2790 . 
     Once the first end  2920  is secured to the stem locking bracket  2790 , the user can then secure the middle section  2912  within the channel  2746  of the angled extension  2744 . To do so, the user simply aligns the middle section  2912  with the channel  2746  and applies pressure until the middle section  2912  overcomes the first and second angled locking tabs  2752 ,  2754  and is seated in the channel  2746 . The first and second angled locking tabs  2752 ,  2754  secure the middle section  2912  in the channel  2746 .  FIG. 211  is a perspective view showing connection of the ribbed fastener  2719  with the lower stem portion  2714 , which is done once the lower stem portion  2714  is seated in the channel  2746 . Particularly, once the lower stem portion  2714  is seated in the channel  2746  a user can insert the ribbed fastener  2719 , e.g., a Christmas tree style push rivet, into one side of the second transverse opening  2750 , through the through-hole  2928  of the middle section  2912  of the lower stem portion  2714 , and out the other side of the second transverse opening  2750 . This engagement prevents the lower stem portion  2714  from being removed from the channel  2746 , as any attempt to do so will result in the ribbed fastener  2719  engaging the angled extension  2744 . To remove the lower stem portion  2714 , a user can remove the ribbed fastener  2719  and pull the lower stem portion  2714  out from the channel  2746 . 
     Once the lower stem portion  2714  is connected to the base  2710 , the user can connect the upper stem portion  2716  thereto.  FIG. 212  is a perspective view showing the upper stem portion  2716  connected to the lower stem portion  2714 . To connect upper stem portion  2716  to the lower stem portion  2714 , the user places the enlarged first end  2944  of the upper stem portion  2716  over the second end  2922  of the lower stem portion  2714 , e.g., inserts the second end  2922  of the lower stem portion  2714  into the enlarged first end  2944  of the upper stem portion  2716 , and engages and depresses the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b  of the second snap lock  2918 . The through hole  2948  of the enlarged first end  2944  is then aligned with the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b , which causes the second snap lock  2918  to snap back to its original position with the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b  extending out from the through hole  2948  of the enlarged first end  2944  of the upper stem portion  2716 , thus securing the lower stem portion  2714  and the upper stem portion  2716  together. To disconnect the upper stem portion  2716  and the lower stem portion  2714 , the user can simply depress the first and second protrusions  2932   a ,  2932   b  and pull the upper stem portion  2716  away from the lower stem portion  2714 . As referenced above, the lower stem portion  2714  and the upper stem portion  2716  can be configured as a single stem  2713  that is not divided into multiple components. 
     Once the upper stem portion  2716  is connected to the lower stem portion  2714 , the user can connect the handle assembly  2718  to the upper stem portion  2716 .  FIG. 213  is a perspective view showing the handle assembly  2718  connected to the upper stem portion  2716 . To connect the handle assembly  2718  to the upper stem portion  2716 , the user places the mount  2990  of the handle assembly  2718  over the second end  2946  of the upper stem portion  2716 , e.g., inserts the second end  2946  of the upper stem portion  2716  into the mount  2990  of the handle assembly  2718 , and engages and depresses the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  of the third snap lock  2942 . The through hole  3006  of the mount  2990  is then aligned with the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b , which causes the third snap lock  2942  to snap back to its original position with the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  extending out from the through hole  3006  of the mount  2990  of the handle assembly  2718 , thus securing the handle assembly  2718  and the upper stem portion  2716 . To disconnect the handle assembly  2718  and the upper stem portion  2716 , the use can simply depress the first and second protrusions  2954   a ,  2954   b  and pull the handle assembly  2718  away from the upper stem portion  2716 . 
     When the handle assembly  2718  is secured to the upper stem portion  2716 , the pool cleaner caddy  2708  is fully constructed and can be utilized by placing the pool cleaner  800  on the base  2710 , placing the power and control cable  2089  in the cable housing  3012  of the handle assembly  2718 , and placing the supply  2512  in the power supply housing  3010  of the handle assembly  2718 . A user can grab the handle assembly  2718  to wheel the pool cleaner caddy  2708 , and associated pool cleaner  800  and power supply  2512 , to a desired location. The user can also view the power supply  2512  through the windows  2974 ,  2992  of the handle assembly  2718 . When fully constructed, the pool cleaner caddy  2708  is configured so that the upper section  2914  of the lower stem portion  2714  forms an angle β with the base  2710  (see  FIG. 172 ), which can be approximately 42°. The pool cleaner caddy  2708  is additionally configured so that when the power supply  2512  is positioned in the handle assembly  2718 , it is viewable by a portion of the population that ranges from the 50 th  percentile of the female population to the 95 th  percentile of the male population standing at arms length from the pool cleaner caddy  2708 . 
     It will be understood that the embodiments of the present disclosure described herein are merely exemplary and that a person skilled in the art may make many variations and modifications without departing from the spirit and the scope of the disclosure. All such variations and modifications, including those discussed above, are intended to be included within the scope of the disclosure.